ABB Relion 670 Series RES670 Technical Manual Download Page 837 | Manualshive

Page: 837 / 888

background image

Section 24

Inverse time characteristics

24.1

Application

In order to assure time selectivity between different overcurrent protections at different
points in the network different time delays for the different protections are normally used.
The simplest way to do this is to use definite time-lag. In more sophisticated applications
current dependent time characteristics are used. Both alternatives are shown in a simple
application with three overcurrent protections operating in series.

xx05000129_ansi.vsd

IPickup

IPickup

IPickup

ANSI05000129 V1 EN

Figure 325:

Three overcurrent protections operating in series

en05000130.vsd

Time

Fault point

position

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 1

IEC05000130 V1 EN

Figure 326:

Definite time overcurrent characteristics

1MRK 511 365-UUS A

Section 24

Inverse time characteristics

Phasor measurement unit RES670 2.1 ANSI

831

Technical manual

«
...
835
836
837
838
839
...
»

Summary of Contents for Relion 670 Series RES670

Page 1: ...Relion 670 series Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 2: ......

Page 3: ...Document ID 1MRK 511 365 UUS Issued February 2016 Revision A Product version 2 1 Copyright 2016 ABB All rights reserved ...

Page 4: ...erms of such license This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org This product includes cryptographic software written developed by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com and Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Trademarks ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group All other brand or product names mentioned in this document may be...

Page 5: ...product failure would create a risk for harm to property or persons including but not limited to personal injuries or death shall be the sole responsibility of the person or entity applying the equipment and those so responsible are hereby requested to ensure that all measures are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be compl...

Page 6: ...rning electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits Low voltage directive 2006 95 EC This conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB in accordance with the product standard EN 60255 26 for the EMC directive and with the product standards EN 60255 1 and EN 60255 27 for the low voltage directive The product is designed in accordance with the international standards of the IEC ...

Page 7: ...functions 45 Control and monitoring functions 46 Communication 51 Basic IED functions 52 Section 3 Analog inputs 55 Introduction 55 Function block 55 Signals 56 Settings 58 Monitored data 66 Operation principle 67 Technical data 68 Section 4 Binary input and output modules 71 Binary input 71 Binary input debounce filter 71 Oscillation filter 71 Settings 71 Setting parameters for binary input modul...

Page 8: ... Local HMI 79 Keypad 80 Display 82 LEDs 86 LED configuration alternatives 86 Functionality 86 Status LEDs 87 Indication LEDs 87 Function keys 97 Functionality 97 Operation principle 97 Section 6 Wide area measurement system 101 C37 118 Phasor Measurement Data Streaming Protocol Configuration PMUCONF 101 Identification 101 Functionality 101 Operation principle 101 IEEE C37 118 Message Framework 102...

Page 9: ...6 Settings 146 Operation principle 147 Resistive reach in forward direction 149 Resistive reach in reverse direction 149 Reactive reach in forward and reverse direction 150 Basic detection logic 150 Operating and inhibit conditions 153 Technical data 154 Out of step protection OOSPPAM 78 155 Identification 155 Functionality 155 Function block 156 Signals 156 Settings 157 Monitored data 158 Operati...

Page 10: ...within the function 199 Internal polarizing 200 External polarizing for ground fault function 202 Directional detection for ground fault function 202 Base quantities within the protection 202 Internal ground fault protection structure 203 Four residual overcurrent steps 203 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison function 204 Second harmonic blocking element 207 Swit...

Page 11: ...ctionality 227 Function block 229 Signals 229 Settings 230 Monitored data 232 Operation principle 232 Function inputs 232 Technical data 240 Thermal overload protection one time constant Fahrenheit Celsius LFPTTR LCPTTR 26 241 Identification 241 Functionality 241 Function block 242 Signals 242 Settings 243 Monitored data 245 Operation principle 245 Technical data 249 Directional underpower protect...

Page 12: ... Identification 269 Functionality 269 Function block 270 Signals 270 Settings 271 Monitored data 273 Operation principle 274 Measurement principle 274 Time delay 275 Blocking 280 Design 281 Technical data 283 Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV 59 283 Identification 283 Functionality OV2PTOV 284 Function block 284 Signals 284 Settings 285 Monitored data 287 Operation principle 287 Measurement ...

Page 13: ... 81 303 Identification 303 Functionality 304 Function block 304 Signals 304 Settings 305 Monitored data 305 Operation principle 305 Measurement principle 306 Time delay 306 Blocking 306 Design 307 Technical data 307 Rate of change frequency protection SAPFRC 81 308 Identification 308 Functionality 308 Function block 309 Signals 309 Settings 309 Monitored data 310 Operation principle 310 Measuremen...

Page 14: ...uantities for CVGAPC function 334 Built in overcurrent protection steps 335 Built in undercurrent protection steps 340 Built in overvoltage protection steps 341 Built in undervoltage protection steps 341 Logic diagram 341 Technical data 347 Section 12 System protection and control 351 Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC 351 Identification 351 Functionality 351 Function block 351 Signals 351 Settings 352 ...

Page 15: ...ical data 375 Section 14 Control 377 Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation SLGAPC 377 Identification 377 Functionality 377 Function block 378 Signals 378 Settings 380 Monitored data 380 Operation principle 380 Graphical display 381 Selector mini switch VSGAPC 382 Identification 382 Functionality 383 Function block 383 Signals 383 Settings 384 Operation principle 384 Ge...

Page 16: ...ings 391 Operation principle 407 Single command 16 signals SINGLECMD 407 Identification 407 Functionality 407 Function block 408 Signals 408 Settings 409 Operation principle 409 Section 15 Logic 411 Tripping logic SMPPTRC 94 411 Operation principle 411 Logic diagram 412 Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC 416 Identification 416 Functionality 416 Function block 417 Signals 417 Settings 419 Operation principl...

Page 17: ...ction block 426 Signals 426 Settings 427 Operation principle 427 Technical data 428 Basic configurable logic blocks 428 AND function block AND 429 Function block 429 Signals 430 Technical data 430 Controllable gate function block GATE 430 Function block 430 Signals 430 Settings 431 Technical data 431 Inverter function block INV 431 Function block 431 Signals 431 Technical data 432 Loop delay funct...

Page 18: ... data 437 Settable timer function block TIMERSET 437 Function block 438 Signals 438 Settings 439 Technical data 439 Exclusive OR function block XOR 439 Function block 439 Signals 440 Technical data 440 Configurable logic blocks Q T 440 ANDQT function block 442 Function block 442 Signals 442 Technical data 442 Single point indication related signals combining function block INDCOMBSPQT 443 Function...

Page 19: ...block 450 Signals 450 Settings 450 Technical data 450 Reset Set function block RSMEMORYQT 450 Function block 451 Signals 451 Settings 452 Technical data 452 Set Reset function block SRMEMORYQT 452 Function block 453 Signals 453 Settings 453 Technical data 453 Settable timer function block TIMERSETQT 453 Function block 454 Signals 454 Settings 454 Technical data 455 Exclusive OR function block XORQ...

Page 20: ...TIGAPC 461 Identification 461 Functionality 462 Function block 462 Signals 462 Settings 463 Monitored data 463 Operation principle 463 Technical data 464 Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16 465 Identification 465 Functionality 465 Function block 465 Signals 465 Setting parameters 466 Operation principle 466 Technical data 468 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation IT BGA...

Page 21: ...ion 476 Functionality 476 Function block 476 Signals 477 Settings 477 Operation principle 477 Technical data 478 Comparator for real inputs REALCOMP 478 Identification 478 Functionality 479 Function block 479 Signals 479 Settings 479 Operation principle 480 Technical data 482 Section 16 Monitoring 483 Measurements 483 Identification 483 Functionality 484 Function block 485 Signals 487 Settings 490...

Page 22: ...Operation principle 523 Technical data 524 Breaker monitoring SSCBR 525 Identification 525 Functionality 525 Function block 525 Signals 526 Settings 527 Monitored data 528 Operation principle 528 Circuit breaker contact travel time 530 Circuit breaker status 532 Remaining life of circuit breaker 532 Accumulated energy 533 Circuit breaker operation cycles 535 Circuit breaker operation monitoring 53...

Page 23: ...lock 571 Signals 571 Settings 572 Operation principle 572 Measured value expander block RANGE_XP 573 Identification 573 Functionality 573 Function block 574 Signals 574 Operation principle 574 Limit counter L4UFCNT 575 Identification 575 Identification 575 Functionality 575 Operation principle 575 Design 575 Reporting 577 Function block 577 Signals 577 Settings 578 Monitored data 578 Technical dat...

Page 24: ...dling ETPMMTR 589 Identification 589 Functionality 589 Function block 590 Signals 591 Settings 592 Monitored data 593 Operation principle 593 Technical data 597 Technical data 597 Section 18 Station communication 599 Communication protocols 599 Communication protocol diagnostics 599 DNP3 protocol 600 IEC 61850 8 1 communication protocol 600 Functionality 600 Communication interfaces and protocols ...

Page 25: ...n protocol 609 Introduction 609 Function block 610 Signals 610 Output signals 610 Settings 613 Monitored data 616 Operation principle 618 Technical data 620 LON communication protocol 621 Functionality 621 Settings 621 Operation principle 622 IEC 60870 5 103 communication protocol 641 Introduction 641 Measurands for IEC 60870 5 103 I103MEAS 641 Functionality 641 Identification 642 Function block 6...

Page 26: ... IEC 60870 5 103 I103FLTPROT 647 Functionality 647 Identification 647 Function block 648 Signals 648 Settings 649 IED status for IEC 60870 5 103 I103IED 649 Functionality 649 Identification 650 Function block 650 Signals 650 Settings 650 Supervison status for IEC 60870 5 103 I103SUPERV 651 Functionality 651 Identification 651 Function block 651 Signals 651 Settings 652 Status for user defined sign...

Page 27: ...ation 657 Function block 657 Signals 657 Settings 658 Function commands generic for IEC 60870 5 103 I103GENCMD 658 Functionality 658 Identification 659 Function block 659 Signals 659 Settings 660 IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870 5 103 I103POSCMD 660 Functionality 660 Identification 660 Function block 661 Signals 661 Settings 661 Operation principle 661 General 661 Communication ...

Page 28: ...e GOOSEMVRCV678 Identification 678 Functionality 679 Function block 679 Signals 679 Settings 679 Operation principle 679 GOOSE function block to receive a single point value GOOSESPRCV680 Identification 680 Functionality 680 Function block 680 Signals 681 Settings 681 Operation principle 681 MULTICMDRCV and MULTICMDSND 682 Functionality 682 Design 682 General 682 Function block 683 Signals 683 Set...

Page 29: ...ority check ATHCHCK 699 Identification 699 Functionality 699 Operation principle 700 Authorization with Central Account Management enabled IED 702 Authority management AUTHMAN 705 Identification 705 AUTHMAN 705 Settings 705 FTP access with password FTPACCS 706 Identification 706 FTP access with TLS FTPACCS 706 Settings 706 Authority status ATHSTAT 707 Identification 707 Functionality 707 Function ...

Page 30: ...cal data 723 Parameter setting groups 723 Functionality 723 Function block 724 Signals 724 Settings 725 Operation principle 725 ChangeLock function CHNGLCK 726 Functionality 726 Function block 727 Signals 727 Operation principle 727 Test mode functionality TEST 728 Functionality 728 Function block 728 Signals 729 Settings 729 Operation principle 729 IED identifiers 730 Functionality 730 Settings 7...

Page 31: ...g inputs SMAI 737 Functionality 737 Function block 737 Signals 738 Settings 739 Operation principle 741 Frequency values 742 Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM 743 Functionality 743 Function block 743 Signals 743 Settings 744 Operation principle 745 Global base values GBASVAL 745 Identification 745 Functionality 745 Settings 745 Primary system values PRIMVAL 746 Identification 746 Functionality 746 Se...

Page 32: ...ign 761 Technical data 761 Local human machine interface Local HMI 761 Transformer input module TRM 761 Introduction 761 Design 762 Technical data 763 Analog digital conversion module with time synchronization ADM 764 Introduction 764 Design 765 Binary input module BIM 767 Introduction 767 Design 767 Signals 770 Settings 771 Monitored data 771 Technical data 772 Binary output modules BOM 773 Intro...

Page 33: ... 791 Design 791 Signals 793 Settings 793 Monitored data 795 Technical data 795 Galvanic RS485 communication module 795 Introduction 795 Design 796 Technical data 797 Optical ethernet module OEM 797 Introduction 797 Functionality 797 Design 798 Technical data 798 GPS time synchronization module GTM 799 Introduction 799 Design 799 Monitored data 799 Technical data 799 GPS antenna 800 Introduction 80...

Page 34: ... mounting 814 Wall mounting 815 Overview 815 Mounting procedure for wall mounting 816 How to reach the rear side of the IED 816 Side by side 19 rack mounting 817 Overview 817 Mounting procedure for side by side rack mounting 818 IED mounted with a RHGS6 case 818 Side by side flush mounting 819 Overview 819 Mounting procedure for side by side flush mounting 820 Technical data 820 Enclosure 820 Elec...

Page 35: ...haracteristics 831 Application 831 Principle of operation 834 Mode of operation 834 Inverse characteristics 840 Section 25 Glossary 871 Glossary 871 Table of contents Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 29 Technical manual ...

Page 36: ...30 ...

Page 37: ...2 Intended audience This manual addresses system engineers and installation and commissioning personnel who use technical data during engineering installation and commissioning and in normal service The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems protection equipment protection functions and the configured functional logic in the IEDs The installation and commissioning per...

Page 38: ...engineer the IEDs using the various tools available within the PCM600 software The manual provides instructions on how to set up a PCM600 project and insert IEDs to the project structure The manual also recommends a sequence for the engineering of protection and control functions LHMI functions as well as communication engineering for IEC 60870 5 103 IEC 61850 DNP3 LON and SPA The installation man...

Page 39: ...d The manual can also provide assistance for calculating settings The technical manual contains operation principle descriptions and lists function blocks logic diagrams input and output signals setting parameters and technical data sorted per function The manual can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase installation and commissioning phase and during normal service The com...

Page 40: ...ual IEC 61850 Edition 2 1MRK 511 350 UEN Point list manual DNP3 1MRK 511 354 UUS Accessories guide 1MRK 514 012 BUS Connection and Installation components 1MRK 513 003 BEN Test system COMBITEST 1MRK 512 001 BEN 1 4 Document symbols and conventions 1 4 1 Symbols The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in electrical shock The warning icon indicates the prese...

Page 41: ...erformance leading to personal injury or death It is important that the user fully complies with all warning and cautionary notices 1 4 2 Document conventions Abbreviations and acronyms in this manual are spelled out in the glossary The glossary also contains definitions of important terms Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the push button icons For example to ...

Page 42: ...e the signal starts and continues Signal paths that extend beyond the logic diagram and continue in another diagram have the suffix cont Dimensions are provided both in inches and mm If it is not specifically mentioned then the dimension is in mm 1 5 IEC61850 edition 1 edition 2 mapping Table 1 IEC61850 edition 1 edition 2 mapping Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes...

Page 43: ...PTRC_B18 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC BUSPTRC_B19 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC BUSPTRC_B20 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC BUSPTRC_B21 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC BUSPTRC_B22 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC BUSPTRC_B23 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC BUSPTRC_B24 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC BUTPTRC_B1 BUTPTRC BBTPLLN0 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC_B2 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC BUTPTRC_B3 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC BUTPTRC_B4 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC BUTPTRC_B5 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC BUTPTRC_B6 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC BUTPTRC_B7 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC BUTPTRC_B...

Page 44: ... CCRBRF CCRBRF CCRWRBRF CCRWRBRF CCRWRBRF CCSRBRF CCSRBRF CCSRBRF CCSSPVC CCSRDIF CCSSPVC CMMXU CMMXU CMMXU CMSQI CMSQI CMSQI COUVGAPC COUVLLN0 COUVPTOV COUVPTUV COUVPTOV COUVPTUV CVGAPC GF2LLN0 GF2MMXN GF2PHAR GF2PTOV GF2PTUC GF2PTUV GF2PVOC PH1PTRC GF2MMXN GF2PHAR GF2PTOV GF2PTUC GF2PTUV GF2PVOC PH1PTRC CVMMXN CVMMXN CVMMXN D2PTOC D2LLN0 D2PTOC PH1PTRC D2PTOC PH1PTRC DPGAPC DPGGIO DPGAPC DRPRDRE...

Page 45: ... FTAQFVR FTAQFVR FUFSPVC SDDRFUF FUFSPVC SDDSPVC GENPDIF GENPDIF GENGAPC GENPDIF GENPHAR GENPTRC GOOSEBINRCV BINGREC GOOSEDPRCV DPGREC GOOSEINTLKRCV INTGREC GOOSEINTRCV INTSGREC GOOSEMVRCV MVGREC GOOSESPRCV BINSGREC GOOSEVCTRRCV VCTRGREC GOPPDOP GOPPDOP GOPPDOP PH1PTRC GRPTTR GRPTTR GRPTTR GSPTTR GSPTTR GSPTTR GUPPDUP GUPPDUP GUPPDUP PH1PTRC HZPDIF HZPDIF HZPDIF INDCALCH INDCALH INDCALH ITBGAPC IB...

Page 46: ... LCZSPTOV LCZSPTOV LD0LLN0 LLN0 LDLPSCH LDLPDIF LDLPSCH LDRGFC STSGGIO LDRGFC LEXPDIS LEXPDIS LEXPDIS LEXPTRC LFPTTR LFPTTR LFPTTR LMBRFLO LMBRFLO LMBRFLO LOVPTUV LOVPTUV LOVPTUV LPHD LPHD LPTTR LPTTR LPTTR LT3CPDIF LT3CPDIF LT3CGAPC LT3CPDIF LT3CPHAR LT3CPTRC LT6CPDIF LT6CPDIF LT6CGAPC LT6CPDIF LT6CPHAR LT6CPTRC MVGAPC MVGGIO MVGAPC NS2PTOC NS2LLN0 NS2PTOC NS2PTRC NS2PTOC NS2PTRC NS4PTOC EF4LLN0 ...

Page 47: ...GEN4PHAR PH1BPTOC PH1PTRC PHPIOC PHPIOC PHPIOC PRPSTATUS RCHLCCH RCHLCCH SCHLCCH PSLPSCH ZMRPSL PSLPSCH PSPPPAM PSPPPAM PSPPPAM PSPPTRC QCBAY QCBAY QCRSV QCRSV QCRSV REFPDIF REFPDIF REFPDIF ROTIPHIZ ROTIPHIZ ROTIPHIZ ROTIPTRC ROV2PTOV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC ROV2PTOV PH1PTRC ROV2PTOV SAPFRC SAPFRC SAPFRC SAPTOF SAPTOF SAPTOF SAPTUF SAPTUF SAPTUF SCCVPTOC SCCVPTOC SCCVPTOC SCILO SCILO SCILO SCSWI SCSWI SC...

Page 48: ...HIZ STEFPHIZ STEFPHIZ STTIPHIZ STTIPHIZ STTIPHIZ SXCBR SXCBR SXCBR SXSWI SXSWI SXSWI T2WPDIF T2WPDIF T2WGAPC T2WPDIF T2WPHAR T2WPTRC T3WPDIF T3WPDIF T3WGAPC T3WPDIF T3WPHAR T3WPTRC TCLYLTC TCLYLTC TCLYLTC TCSLTC TCMYLTC TCMYLTC TCMYLTC TEIGAPC TEIGGIO TEIGAPC TEIGGIO TEILGAPC TEILGGIO TEILGAPC TMAGAPC TMAGGIO TMAGAPC TPPIOC TPPIOC TPPIOC TR1ATCC TR1ATCC TR1ATCC TR8ATCC TR8ATCC TR8ATCC TRPTTR TRPTT...

Page 49: ...PSCH ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF ZGVPDIS ZGVLLN0 PH1PTRC ZGVPDIS ZGVPTUV PH1PTRC ZGVPDIS ZGVPTUV ZMCAPDIS ZMCAPDIS ZMCAPDIS ZMCPDIS ZMCPDIS ZMCPDIS ZMFCPDIS ZMFCLLN0 PSFPDIS ZMFPDIS ZMFPTRC ZMMMXU PSFPDIS ZMFPDIS ZMFPTRC ZMMMXU ZMFPDIS ZMFLLN0 PSFPDIS ZMFPDIS ZMFPTRC ZMMMXU PSFPDIS PSFPDIS ZMFPDIS ZMFPTRC ZMMMXU ZMHPDIS ZMHPDIS ZMHPDIS ZMMAPDIS ZMMAPDIS ZMMAPDIS ZMMPDIS ZMMP...

Page 50: ...e Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes ZMRPDIS ZMRPDIS ZMRPDIS ZMRPSB ZMRPSB ZMRPSB ZSMGAPC ZSMGAPC ZSMGAPC Section 1 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Introduction 44 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 51: ...37 118 analogs 9 16 0 2 ANALOGREPORT3 Protocol reporting of analog data via IEEE 1344 and C37 118 analogs 17 24 0 2 BINARYREPORT1 Protocol reporting of binary data via IEEE 1344 and C37 118 binary 1 8 0 2 BINARYREPORT2 Protocol reporting of binary data via IEEE 1344 and C37 118 binary 9 16 0 2 BINARYREPORT3 Protocol reporting of binary data via IEEE 1344 and C37 118 binary 17 24 0 2 PMUSTATUS Diag...

Page 52: ... SAPFRC 81 Rate of change frequency protection 0 6 FTAQFVR 81A Frequency time accumulation protection 0 4 Multipurpose protection CVGAPC General current and voltage protection 0 8 SMAIHPAC Multipurpose filter 0 6 1 67 requires voltage 2 67N requires voltage 2 3 Control and monitoring functions IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Phasor measurement unit RES670 Control QCBAY Apparatus control 1 LOCR...

Page 53: ...n commands user defined for IEC 60870 5 103 1 Secondary system supervision CCSSPVC 87 Current circuit supervision 0 5 FUFSPVC Fuse failure supervision 0 4 Logic SMPPTRC 94 Tripping logic 6 TMAGAPC Trip matrix logic 12 ALMCALH Logic for group alarm 5 WRNCALH Logic for group warning 5 INDCALH Logic for group indication 5 AND GATE INV LLD OR PULSETIMER RSMEMORY SRMEMORY TIMERSET XOR Basic configurabl...

Page 54: ...al inputs 12 Monitoring CVMMXN VMMXU CMSQI VMSQI VNMMXU Measurements 6 CMMXU Measurements 10 AISVBAS Function block for service value presentation of secondary analog inputs 1 EVENT Event function 20 DRPRDRE A1RADR A4RADR B1RBDR B8RBDR Disturbance report 1 SPGAPC Generic communication function for Single Point indication 64 SP16GAPC Generic communication function for Single Point indication 16 inp...

Page 55: ...Supervison status for IEC 60870 5 103 1 I103USRDEF Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870 5 103 20 L4UFCNT Event counter with limit supervision TEILGAPC Running hour meter 9 Metering PCFCNT Pulse counter logic 16 ETPMMTR Function for energy calculation and demand handling 6 Table 2 Total number of instances for basic configurable logic blocks Basic configurable logic block Total number of i...

Page 56: ...PULSETIMERQT 40 RSMEMORYQT 40 SRMEMORYQT 40 TIMERSETQT 40 XORQT 40 Table 4 Total number of instances for extended logic package Extended configurable logic block Total number of instances AND 180 GATE 49 INV 180 LLD 49 OR 180 PULSETIMER 59 SLGAPC 74 SRMEMORY 110 TIMERSET 49 VSGAPC 130 XOR 49 Section 2 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Available functions 50 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manua...

Page 57: ...DNPFREC DNP3 0 fault records for TCP IP and EIA 485 communication protocol 1 IEC 61850 8 1 Parameter setting function for IEC 61850 1 GOOSEINTLKRCV Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking 59 GOOSEBINRCV GOOSE binary receive 16 GOOSEDPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a double point value 64 GOOSEINTRCV GOOSE function block to receive an integer value 32 GOOSEMVRCV GOOSE function bloc...

Page 58: ...k status 1 Process bus communication IEC 61850 9 2 1 PRP IEC 62439 3 parallel redundancy protocol 0 1 Remote communication Binary signal transfer receive transmit 6 36 Transmission of analog data from LDCM 1 Receive binary status from remote LDCM 6 3 3 1 Only included for 9 2LE products 2 5 Basic IED functions Table 5 Basic IED functions IEC 61850 or function name Description INTERRSIG SELFSUPEVLS...

Page 59: ...ol DOSFRNT Denial of service frame rate control for front port DOSLANAB Denial of service frame rate control for OEM port AB DOSLANCD Denial of service frame rate control for OEM port CD DOSSCKT Denial of service socket flow control GBASVAL Global base values for settings PRIMVAL Primary system values ALTMS Time master supervision ALTIM Time management MSTSER DNP3 0 for serial communication protoc...

Page 60: ...r FNKEYTY1 FNKEYTY5 FNKEYMD1 FNKEYMD5 Parameter setting function for HMI in PCM600 LEDGEN General LED indication part for LHMI OPENCLOSE_LED LHMI LEDs for open and close keys GRP1_LED1 GRP1_LED15 GRP2_LED1 GRP2_LED15 GRP3_LED1 GRP3_LED15 Basic part for CP HW LED indication module Section 2 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Available functions 54 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 61: ...y A reference PhaseAngleRef can be defined to facilitate service values reading This analog channels phase angle will always be fixed to zero degrees and all other angle information will be shown in relation to this analog input During testing and commissioning of the IED the reference channel can be changed to facilitate testing and service values reading The availability of VT inputs depends on ...

Page 62: ...urrent input 11 CH12 I STRING Analog current input 12 Table 8 TRM_6I_6U Output signals Name Type Description STATUS BOOLEAN Analog input module status CH1 I STRING Analogue current input 1 CH2 I STRING Analog current input 2 CH3 I STRING Analog current input 3 CH4 I STRING Analog current input 4 CH5 I STRING Analog current input 5 CH6 I STRING Analog current input 6 CH7 V STRING Analog voltage inp...

Page 63: ...NG Analog current input 5 CH6 I STRING Analog current input 6 CH7 I STRING Analog current input 7 CH8 V STRING Analog voltage input 8 CH9 V STRING Analog voltage input 9 CH10 V STRING Analog voltage input 10 CH 11 V STRING Analog voltage input 11 CH12 V STRING Analog voltage input 12 Table 11 TRM_9I_3U Output signals Name Type Description STATUS BOOLEAN Analog input module status CH1 I STRING Anal...

Page 64: ...CH2 I STRING Analog current input 2 CH3 I STRING Analog current input 3 CH4 I STRING Analog current input 4 CH5 I STRING Analog current input 5 CH6 I STRING Analog current input 6 CH7 I STRING Analog current input 7 CH8 I STRING Analog current input 8 CH9 I STRING Analog current input 9 CH10 I STRING Analog current input 10 CH 11 V STRING Analog voltage input 11 CH12 V STRING Analog voltage input ...

Page 65: ...on CT_WyePoint1 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec1 1 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim1 1 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current CT_WyePoint2 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec2 1 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim2 1 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current CT_WyeP...

Page 66: ...ject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec8 1 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim8 1 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current CT_WyePoint9 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec9 1 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim9 1 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current CT_WyePoint10 FromObject ToObject ToOb...

Page 67: ...the opposite CTsec5 1 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim5 1 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current CT_WyePoint6 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec6 1 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim6 1 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current VTsec7 0 001 999 999 V 0 001 110 000 Rated VT secondary voltage VTprim7 0 05 2000 00 kV 0 05 400 ...

Page 68: ...ct ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec5 1 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim5 1 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current CT_WyePoint6 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec6 1 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim6 1 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current Table 17 TRM_7I_5U Non group settings basic Name ...

Page 69: ...00 kV 0 05 400 00 Rated VT primary voltage VTsec9 0 001 999 999 V 0 001 110 000 Rated VT secondary voltage VTprim9 0 05 2000 00 kV 0 05 400 00 Rated VT primary voltage VTsec10 0 001 999 999 V 0 001 110 000 Rated VT secondary voltage VTprim10 0 05 2000 00 kV 0 05 400 00 Rated VT primary voltage VTsec11 0 001 999 999 V 0 001 110 000 Rated VT secondary voltage VTprim11 0 05 2000 00 kV 0 05 400 00 Rat...

Page 70: ...ject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec7 1 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim7 1 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current CT_WyePoint8 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec8 1 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim8 1 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current CT_WyePoint9 FromObject ToObj...

Page 71: ...e opposite CTsec5 1 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim5 1 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current CT_WyePoint6 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec6 1 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim6 1 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current CT_WyePoint7 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite...

Page 72: ...Error 2 AngRefLow 3 Uncorrelated Service value status Table 21 TRM_12I Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description STATUS BOOLEAN 0 Ok 1 Error Analog input module status Table 22 TRM_6I_6U Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description STATUS BOOLEAN 0 Ok 1 Error Analog input module status Table 23 TRM_6I Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description STATUS BOOLEAN 0 Ok...

Page 73: ...E point towards the object or away from the object This information must be set in the IED The convention of the directionality is defined as follows Positive value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction into the object Negative value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction out from the object For directional functions the directional conventions are de...

Page 74: ...ction always looks towards the protected object The settings of the IED is performed in primary values The ratios of the main CTs and VTs are therefore basic data for the IED The user has to set the rated secondary and primary currents and voltages of the CTs and VTs to provide the IED with their rated ratios The CT and VT ratio and the name on respective channel is done under Main menu Hardware A...

Page 75: ...cont 1 8 In for 30 min at In 1 A 1 6 In for 30 min at In 5 A Burden 350 mVA at In 5 A 200 mVA at In 1 A Ac voltage Vn 120 V 0 5 288 V Operative range 0 340 V Permissive overload 420 V cont 450 V 10 s Burden 20 mVA at 110 V Frequency fn 60 50 Hz 5 Table 29 CT and VT circuit connectors Connector type Rated voltage and current Maximum conductor area Screw compression type 250 V AC 20 A 4 mm2 AWG12 2 ...

Page 76: ...70 ...

Page 77: ...again The same happens when the signal goes down to 0 again 4 1 2 Oscillation filter Binary input wiring can be very long in substations and there are electromagnetic fields from for example nearby breakers An oscillation filter is used to reduce the disturbance from the system when a binary input starts oscillating An oscillation counter counts the debounced signal state changes during 1 s If the...

Page 78: ...illation release limit 4 1 3 2 Setting parameters for binary input output module Table 31 IOMIN Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Enabled Binary input output module in operation On or not Off DebounceTime 0 001 0 020 s 0 001 0 001 Debounce time for binary inputs OscBlock 1 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit OscRelease 1 30 Hz 1 30 O...

Page 79: ...efault screen EvListSrtOrder Latest on top Oldest on top Latest on top Sort order of event list AutoIndicationDRP Disabled Enabled Disabled Automatic indication of disturbance report SubstIndSLD No Yes No Substitute indication on single line diagram InterlockIndSLD No Yes No Interlock indication on single line diagram BypassCommands No Yes No Enable bypass of commands 5 2 Local HMI signals 5 2 1 I...

Page 80: ... signals Name Type Description HMI ON BOOLEAN Backlight of the LCD display is active RED S BOOLEAN Red LED on the LCD HMI is steady YELLOW S BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD HMI is steady YELLOW F BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD HMI is flashing RSTPULSE BOOLEAN A reset pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCD HMI are cleared LEDSRST BOOLEAN Active when the LEDs on the LCD HMI are not ON Section 5 1MR...

Page 81: ...1 en vsd IEC09000321 V1 EN Figure 4 LEDGEN function block GRP1_LED1 HM1L01R HM1L01Y HM1L01G IEC09000322 V1 EN Figure 5 GRP1_LED1 function block The GRP1_LED1 function block is an example The 15 LEDs in each of the three groups have a similar function block 5 3 3 Signals Table 35 LEDGEN Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Input to block the operation of the LEDs RESET BOOLEA...

Page 82: ...art 0 0 100 0 s 0 1 0 0 Defines the disturbance length t_MaxTripDelay 0 1 100 0 s 0 1 1 0 Maximum time for the definition of a disturbance Table 39 GRP1_LED1 Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description SequenceType Follow S Follow F LatchedAck F S LatchedAck S F LatchedColl S LatchedReset S Follow S Sequence type for LED 1 local HMI alarm group 1 LabelOff 0 18 1 G1L01_...

Page 83: ...YMD1 Input signals Name Type Default Description LEDCTL1 BOOLEAN 0 LED control input for function key Table 41 FNKEYMD1 Output signals Name Type Description FKEYOUT1 BOOLEAN Output controlled by function key 5 4 4 Settings Table 42 FNKEYMD1 Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Mode Disabled Toggle Pulsed Disabled Output operation mode PulseTime 0 001 60 000 s 0 ...

Page 84: ...hortcut Control Disabled Function key type MenuShortcut 0 Menu shortcut for function key MenuShortcut values are product dependent and created dynamically depending on the product main menu Section 5 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Local Human Machine Interface LHMI 78 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 85: ...00239 2 en vsd ANSI13000239 V2 EN Figure 7 Local human machine interface The LHMI of the IED contains the following elements 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 5 Local Human Machine Interface LHMI Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 79 Technical manual ...

Page 86: ... in different views or menus The push buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms reset indications provide help and switch between local and remote control mode The keypad also contains programmable push buttons that can be configured either as menu shortcut or control buttons Section 5 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Local Human Machine Interface LHMI 80 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manu...

Page 87: ...ntrol navigation and command push buttons and RJ 45 communication port 1 5 Function button 6 Close 7 Open 8 Escape 9 Left 10 Down 11 Up 12 Right 13 Key 14 Enter 15 Remote Local 16 Uplink LED 17 Not in use 18 Multipage 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 5 Local Human Machine Interface LHMI Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 81 Technical manual ...

Page 88: ...lay The LHMI includes a graphical monochrome liquid crystal display LCD with a resolution of 320 x 240 pixels The character size can vary The display view is divided into four basic areas Section 5 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Local Human Machine Interface LHMI 82 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 89: ...tent The status area shows the current IED time the user that is currently logged in and the object identification string which is settable via the LHMI or with PCM600 If text pictures or other items do not fit in the display a vertical scroll bar appears on the right The text in content area is truncated from the beginning if it does not fit in the display horizontally Truncation is indicated wit...

Page 90: ...ce The function key button panel shows on request what actions are possible with the function buttons Each function button has a LED indication that can be used as a feedback signal for the function button control action The LED is connected to the required signal with PCM600 Section 5 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Local Human Machine Interface LHMI 84 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual...

Page 91: ...B B979 FD4A971475E3 V1 EN Figure 12 Indication LED panel The function button and indication LED panels are not visible at the same time Each panel is shown by pressing one of the function buttons or the Multipage button Pressing the ESC button clears the panel from the display Both panels have a dynamic width that depends on the label string length 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 5 Local Human Machine ...

Page 92: ...lines can be selected by using the Up Down arrow buttons Pressing the Enter key shows details about the selected LED Pressing the ESC button exits from information pop ups as well as from the LED panel as such The Multipage button has a LED This LED is lit whenever any LED on any panel is lit If there are un acknowledged indication LEDs then the Multipage LED blinks To acknowledge LEDs press the C...

Page 93: ... yellow LED on has been active Red LED unlit no attention required blinking user performs a common write from PCM600 steady at least one of the signals configured to turn the red LED on has been active The yellow and red status LEDs are configured in the disturbance recorder function DRPRDRE by connecting a pickup or trip signal from the actual function to a BxRBDR binary input function block usin...

Page 94: ...triggered not level triggered The acknowledgment reset is performed via the button and menus on the LHMI From function input The active LED indications can also be acknowledged reset via an input CLRLEDS to the function block LHMICTRL This input can for example be configured to a binary input operated from an external push button or a function button The function is positive edge triggered not lev...

Page 95: ... starting Reset mode The letters S and F in the sequence names have the meaning S Steady and F Flash At the activation of the input signal to any LED the indication on the corresponding LED obtains a color that corresponds to the activated input and operates according to the selected sequence diagrams shown below In the sequence diagrams the different statuses of the LEDs are shown using the follo...

Page 96: ... 15 Operating sequence 1 two colors Sequence 2 Follow F This sequence is the same as Sequence 1 Follow S but the LEDs are flashing instead of showing steady light Sequence 3 LatchedAck F S This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation At the activation of the input signal the indication starts flashing After acknowledg...

Page 97: ...wer priority becomes activated after acknowledgment has been performed on a higher priority signal The low priority signal will be shown as acknowledged when the high priority signal resets Activating signal RED LED Acknow IEC09000313_1_en vsd Activating signal GREEN R R G IEC09000313 V1 EN Figure 17 Operating Sequence 3 LatchedAck F S 2 colors involved If all three signals are activated the order...

Page 98: ...9000315 1 en vsd Activating signal YELLOW G G R R Y Activating signal GREEN IEC09000315 V1 EN Figure 19 Operating sequence 3 three colors involved alternative 2 Sequence 4 LatchedAck S F This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3 but steady and flashing light have been alternated Sequence 5 LatchedColl S This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode At the activatio...

Page 99: ...r according to Figure 21 Activating signal RED LED Reset IEC09000316_1_en vsd Activating signal GREEN R G IEC09000316 V1 EN Figure 21 Operating sequence 5 two colors Sequence 6 LatchedReset S In this mode all activated LEDs which are set to Sequence 6 LatchedReset S are automatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other LEDs set to Sequence 6 LatchedReset S Also in...

Page 100: ...en vsd Activating signal 2 LED 2 Manual reset Activating signal 1 Automatic reset LED 1 Disturbance tRestart IEC01000239 V2 EN Figure 22 Operating sequence 6 LatchedReset S two indications within same disturbance Figure 23 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has elapsed Section 5 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Local Human Machine Interface LHMI 94 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2...

Page 101: ...t IEC01000240 V2 EN Figure 23 Operating sequence 6 LatchedReset S two different disturbances Figure 24 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first one has reset but before tRestart has elapsed 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 5 Local Human Machine Interface LHMI Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 95 Technical manual ...

Page 102: ... IEC01000241 V2 EN Figure 24 Operating sequence 6 LatchedReset S two indications within same disturbance but with reset of activating signal between Figure 25 shows the timing diagram for manual reset Section 5 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Local Human Machine Interface LHMI 96 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 103: ... configuration When used as a menu shortcut a function button provides a fast way to navigate between default nodes in the menu tree When used as a control the button can control a binary signal 5 5 3 2 Operation principle Each output on the FNKEYMD1 FNKEYMD5 function blocks can be controlled from the LHMI function keys By pressing a function button on the LHMI the output status of the actual func...

Page 104: ... has been pressed for more than 500ms Note that the input attribute is reset each time the function block executes The function block execution is marked with a dotted line below Input value Output value IEC09000331_1_en vsd 500ms 500ms 500ms IEC09000331 V2 EN Figure 27 Sequence diagram for setting TOGGLE Setting PULSED In this mode the output sets high 1 when the function key has been pressed for...

Page 105: ...rk the same way When the LHMI is configured so that a certain function button is of type CONTROL then the corresponding input on this function block becomes active and will light the yellow function button LED when high This functionality is active even if the function block operation setting is set to off It has been implemented this way for safety reasons the idea is that the function key LEDs s...

Page 106: ...100 ...

Page 107: ...mber of TCP and or UDP connections with one or more PDC clients synchrophasor client This includes port numbers TCP UDP IP addresses and specific settings for IEEE C37 118 as well as IEEE 1344 protocols 6 1 3 Operation principle The Figure 29 demonstrates RES670 communication configuration diagram As can be seen RES670 can support communication with maximum 8 TCP clients and 6 UDP client groups si...

Page 108: ...r 2 PMUREPORT Instance 1 or 2 PMUREPORT Instance 1 or 2 RES670 1344 C37 118 1344 C37 118 1344 C37 118 1344 C37 118 1344 C37 118 1344 C37 118 1344 C37 118 1344 C37 118 1344 C37 118 Unicast Multicast 1344 C37 118 Unicast Multicast 1344 C37 118 Unicast Multicast 1344 C37 118 Unicast Multicast 1344 C37 118 Unicast Multicast 1344 C37 118 Unicast Multicast PMU ID PMU ID IEC140000117 1 en vsd IEC14000011...

Page 109: ...r protocol for example C37 118 the SPA on TCP IP stops working RES670 supports 8 concurrent TCP connections using IEEE1344 and or C37 118 protocol The following parameters are used to define the TCP connection between RES670 and the TCP clients 1 1344TCPport TCP port for control of IEEE 1344 data for TCP clients 2 C37 118TCPport TCP port for control of IEEE C37 118 data for TCP clients 3 PortSelTC...

Page 110: ...The parameter PortSelTCPclient decides on which physical port should the IEEE1344 C37 118 messages communicate over TCP The parameter also has an option Any where the TCP IEEE1344 C37 118 communication will be available over all the ports and with the option None the TCP IEEE1344 C37 118 communication is stopped It is possible to turn off on the TCP data communication by sending a IEEE1344 or C37 ...

Page 111: ... remain the same If the parameter SendDataUDP x is set Enable the RTDOFF RTDON commands received from the clients are ignored in RES670 It is recommended not to set the parameter SendDataUDP x to SetByProtocol in case of a multicast This is because if one of the clients sends the RTDOFF command all the clients will stop receiving the frames The UDP implementation in RES670 is a UDP_TCP This means ...

Page 112: ...interface which is on the same subnetwork as the gateway Here Any means that any physical network interface Front port LANAB LANCD can be used for sending the TCP command frames If there are more than one UDP client group defined as multicast the user shall set different multicast IP addresses for each UDP group If the user set similar multicast IP addresses for multiple UDP groups the MCastCtrlPo...

Page 113: ... address for UDP client group1 UDPDestPort1 1024 65534 1 8910 UDP destination port for UDP client group1 MCastCtrlPortSel1 None Front LANAB LANCD Any Follow Gateway Any Follow Gateway Select network port for multicast UDP data and Ctrl client SendCfgOnUDP1 Disabled On Disabled Send Config frame2 on UDP for group1 TCPportUDPdataCtrl2 1024 65534 1 4714 TCP port for control of data sent over UDP clie...

Page 114: ... Any Follow Gateway Select network port for multicast UDP data and Ctrl client SendCfgOnUDP3 Disabled Enabled Disabled Send Config frame2 on UDP for group3 TCPportUDPdataCtrl4 1024 65534 1 4716 TCP port for control of data sent over UDP client group4 SendDataUDP4 Disabled Enabled SetByProtocol Disabled Send data to UDP client group4 ProtocolOnUDP4 IEEE1344 C37 118 C37 118 Select protocol for UDP c...

Page 115: ...P5 Disabled Enabled Disabled Send Config frame2 on UDP for group5 TCPportUDPdataCtrl6 1024 65534 1 4718 TCP port for control of data sent over UDP client group6 SendDataUDP6 Disabled Enabled SetByProtocol Disabled Send data to UDP client group6 ProtocolOnUDP6 IEEE1344 C37 118 C37 118 Select protocol for UDP client group6 PMUReportUDP6 1 2 1 1 PMUREPORT instance used for UDP client group6 UDPDestAd...

Page 116: ...be reported to up to 8 clients over TCP and or 6 UDP group clients for multicast or unicast transmission of phasor data from RES670 More information regarding synchrophasor communication structure and TCP UDP configuration is available in section C37 118 Phasor Measurement Data Streaming Protocol Configuration Multiple PMU functionality can be configured in RES670 which can stream out same or diff...

Page 117: ...gh and Magnitude Low triggers IEC140000118 V1 EN Figure 30 Multiple instances of PMUREPORT function block Figure 31 shows both instances of the PHASORREPORT function blocks The instance number is visible in the bottom of each function block For each instance there are four separate PHASORREPORT blocks including 32 configurable phasor channels 8 phasor channels in each PHASORREPORT block Each phaso...

Page 118: ...E C37 118 data frame format IEC140000120 V1 EN Figure 32 Multiple instances of ANALOGREPORT blocks Figure 33 shows both instances of BINARYREPORT function blocks The instance number is visible in the bottom of each function block For each instance there are three separate BINARYREPORT blocks capable of reporting up to 24 Binary signals 8 Binary signals in each BINARYREPORT block These binary signa...

Page 119: ...d ANSI14000301 V1 EN ANALOGREPORT1 ANALOG1 ANALOG2 ANALOG3 ANALOG4 ANALOG5 ANALOG6 ANALOG7 ANALOG8 ANSI14000302 vsd ANSI14000302 V1 EN ANSI14000303 vsd ANALOGREPORT2 ANALOG9 ANALOG10 ANALOG11 ANALOG12 ANALOG13 ANALOG14 ANALOG15 ANALOG16 ANSI14000303 V1 EN 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 6 Wide area measurement system Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 113 Technical manual ...

Page 120: ...NARYREPORT2 BINARY9 BINARY10 BINARY11 BINARY12 BINARY13 BINARY14 BINARY15 BINARY16 ANSI14000306 V1 EN ANSI14000307 vsd BINARYREPORT3 BINARY17 BINARY18 BINARY19 BINARY20 BINARY21 BINARY22 BINARY23 BINARY24 ANSI14000307 V1 EN ANSI14000308 vsd PHASORREPORT1 PHASOR1 PHASOR2 PHASOR3 PHASOR4 PHASOR5 PHASOR6 PHASOR7 PHASOR8 ANSI14000308 V1 EN Section 6 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Wide area measurement system 114 ...

Page 121: ...SOR32 ANSI14000311 V1 EN 6 2 4 Signals Table 45 PMUREPORT Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals FREQTRIG BOOLEAN 0 Frequency trigger DFDTTRIG BOOLEAN 0 Rate of change of frequency trigger MAGHIGHTRIG BOOLEAN 0 Magnitude high trigger MAGLOWTRIG BOOLEAN 0 Magnitude low trigger Table 46 PMUREPORT Output signals Name Type Description TIMESTAT BOOLEAN Time ...

Page 122: ...Analog input channel 11 ANALOG12 REAL 0 0 Analog input channel 12 ANALOG13 REAL 0 0 Analog input channel 13 ANALOG14 REAL 0 0 Analog input channel 14 ANALOG15 REAL 0 0 Analog input channel 15 ANALOG16 REAL 0 0 Analog input channel 16 Table 49 ANALOGREPORT3 Input signals Name Type Default Description ANALOG17 REAL 0 0 Analog input channel 17 ANALOG18 REAL 0 0 Analog input channel 18 ANALOG19 REAL 0...

Page 123: ... Binary input channel 11 BINARY12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel 12 BINARY13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel 13 BINARY14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel 14 BINARY15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel 15 BINARY16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel 16 Table 52 BINARYREPORT3 Input signals Name Type Default Description BINARY17 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel 17 BINARY18 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel 18 BINARY1...

Page 124: ...NAL Group signal Input for Phasor8 Table 54 PHASORREPORT2 Input signals Name Type Default Description PHASOR9 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal Input for Phasor9 PHASOR10 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal Input for Phasor10 PHASOR11 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal Input for Phasor11 PHASOR12 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal Input for Phasor12 PHASOR13 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal Input for Phasor13 PHASOR14 GROUP SIGNAL Group si...

Page 125: ...UP SIGNAL Group signal Input for Phasor24 Table 56 PHASORREPORT4 Input signals Name Type Default Description PHASOR25 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal Input for Phasor25 PHASOR26 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal Input for Phasor26 PHASOR27 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal Input for Phasor27 PHASOR28 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal Input for Phasor28 PHASOR29 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal Input for Phasor29 PHASOR30 GROUP SIGNAL...

Page 126: ...uency information ReportRate 10 10 fr s 60 50Hz 12 10 fr s 60 50Hz 15 10 fr s 60 50Hz 20 25 fr s 60 50Hz 30 25 fr s 60 50Hz 60 50 fr s 60 50Hz 120 100 fr s 60 50Hz 240 200 fr s 60 50Hz 10 10 fr s 60 50Hz Phasor data report rate RptTimetag FirstSample MiddleSample LastSample MiddleSample Method of phasor timetag Table 58 ANALOGREPORT1 Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Des...

Page 127: ...ut Peak of analog input RMS of analog input Unit type for analog 4 Analog5Range 3277 0 10000000000 0 0 1 3277 0 Range for scaling analog 5 in integer format Analog5UnitType Single point on wave RMS of analog input Peak of analog input RMS of analog input Unit type for analog 5 Analog6Range 3277 0 10000000000 0 0 1 3277 0 Range for scaling analog 6 in integer format Analog6UnitType Single point on ...

Page 128: ...nput RMS of analog input Unit type for analog 9 Analog10Range 3277 0 10000000000 0 0 1 3277 0 Range for scaling analog 10 in integer format Analog10UnitType Single point on wave RMS of analog input Peak of analog input RMS of analog input Unit type for analog 10 Analog11Range 3277 0 10000000000 0 0 1 3277 0 Range for scaling analog 11 in integer format Analog11UnitType Single point on wave RMS of ...

Page 129: ...Peak of analog input RMS of analog input Unit type for analog 15 Analog16Range 3277 0 10000000000 0 0 1 3277 0 Range for scaling analog 16 in integer format Analog16UnitType Single point on wave RMS of analog input Peak of analog input RMS of analog input Unit type for analog 16 Table 60 ANALOGREPORT3 Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Analog17Range 3277 0 100...

Page 130: ...t Peak of analog input RMS of analog input Unit type for analog 20 Analog21Range 3277 0 10000000000 0 0 1 3277 0 Range for scaling analog 21 in integer format Analog21UnitType Single point on wave RMS of analog input Peak of analog input RMS of analog input Unit type for analog 21 Analog22Range 3277 0 10000000000 0 0 1 3277 0 Range for scaling analog 22 in integer format Analog22UnitType Single po...

Page 131: ...le 61 PHASORREPORT1 Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description phasor2 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor2 Phasor3 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor3 Phasor4 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor4 Phasor5 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for phasor5 Phasor6 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROS...

Page 132: ...automatic frequency source selection Phasor4Report Disabled Enabled Enabled Reporting phasor 4 Phasor4UseFreqSrc Disabled Enabled Enabled Include phasor 4 for automatic frequency source selection Phasor5Report Disabled Enabled Enabled Reporting phasor 5 Phasor5UseFreqSrc Disabled Enabled Enabled Include phasor 5 for automatic frequency source selection Phasor6Rport Disabled Enabled Enabled Reporti...

Page 133: ...asor9 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor9 Phasor10 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor10 Phasor11 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor 11 Phasor12 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor12 Phasor13 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor13 Phasor14 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B L3 POSSE...

Page 134: ...sabled Enabled Enabled Reporting phasor 12 Phasor12UseFreqSrc Disabled Enabled Enabled Include phasor 12 for automatic frequency source selection Phasor13Report Disabled Enabled Enabled Reporting phasor 13 Phasor13UseFreqSrc Disabled Enabled Enabled Include phasor 13 for automatic frequency source selection Phasor14Report Disabled Enabled Enabled Reporting phasor 14 Phasor14UseFreqSrc Disabled Ena...

Page 135: ...SEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor20 Phasor21 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor21 Phasor22 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor22 Phasor23 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor23 Phasor24 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor24 Phasor17Report Disabled Enabled Enabled Reporting phasor 17 Table c...

Page 136: ...utomatic frequency source selection Phasor21Report Disabled Enabled Enabled Reporting phasor 21 Phasor21UseFreqSrc Disabled Enabled Enabled Include phasor 21 for automatic frequency source selection Phasor22Report Disabled Enabled Enabled Reporting phasor 22 Phasor22UseFreqSrc Disabled Enabled Enabled Include phasor 22 for automatic frequency source selection Phasor23Report Disabled Enabled Enable...

Page 137: ...SEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor28 Phasor29 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor29 Phasor30 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor30 Phasor31 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor31 Phasor32 POSSEQ NEGSEQ ZEROSEQ A B C POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor32 Phasor25Report Disabled Enabled Enabled Reporting phasor 25 Table c...

Page 138: ... for automatic frequency source selection Phasor30Report Disabled Enabled Enabled Reporting phasor 30 Phasor30UseFreqSrc Disabled Enabled Enabled Include phasor 30 for automatic frequency source selection Phasor31Report Disabled Enabled Enabled Reporting phasor 31 Phasor32Report Disabled Enabled Enabled Reporting phasor 32 Phasor31UseFreqSrc Disabled Enabled Enabled Include phasor 31 for automatic...

Page 139: ...log input channel 3 ANALOG4 REAL Analog input channel 4 ANALOG5 REAL Analog input channel 5 ANALOG6 REAL Analog input channel 6 ANALOG7 REAL Analog input channel 7 ANALOG8 REAL Analog input channel 8 Table 67 ANALOGREPORT2 Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description ANALOG9 REAL Analog input channel 9 ANALOG10 REAL Analog input channel 10 ANALOG11 REAL Analog input channel 11 ANALOG12 R...

Page 140: ...BOOLEAN Binary input channel 3 BINARY4 BOOLEAN Binary input channel 4 BINARY5 BOOLEAN Binary input channel 5 BINARY6 BOOLEAN Binary input channel 6 BINARY7 BOOLEAN Binary input channel 7 BINARY8 BOOLEAN Binary input channel 8 Table 70 BINARYREPORT2 Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description BINARY9 BOOLEAN Binary input channel 9 BINARY10 BOOLEAN Binary input channel 10 BINARY11 BOOLEAN...

Page 141: ...ude PHASOR2 REAL deg Phasor 2 angle PHASOR3 REAL Phasor 3 amplitude PHASOR3 REAL deg Phasor 3 angle PHASOR4 REAL phasor 4 amplitude PHASOR4 REAL deg Phasor 4 angle PHASOR5 REAL Phasor 5 amplitude PHASOR5 REAL deg Phasor 5 angle PHASOR6 REAL Phasor 6 amplitude PHASOR6 REAL deg Phasor 6 angle PHASOR7 REAL Phasor 7 Amplitude PHASOR7 REAL deg Phasor 7 angle PHASOR8 REAL Phasor 8 amplitude PHASOR8 REAL...

Page 142: ...pe Values Range Unit Description PHASOR17 REAL Phasor 17 amplitude PHASOR17 REAL deg Phasor 17 angle PHASOR18 REAL Phasor 18 amplitude PHASOR18 REAL deg Phasor 18 angle PHASOR19 REAL Phasor 19 amplitude PHASOR19 REAL deg Phasor 19 angle PHASOR20 REAL Phasor 20 amplitude PHASOR20 REAL deg Phasor 20 angle PHASOR21 REAL Phasor 21 amplitude PHASOR21 REAL deg Phasor 21 angle PHASOR22 REAL Phasor 22 amp...

Page 143: ...hree main functional principles To measure the power system related AC quantities voltage current and to calculate the phasor representation of these quantities To synchronize the calculated phasors with the UTC by time tagging in order to make synchrophasors time is reference To publish all phasor related data by means of TCP IP or UDP IP following the standard IEEE C37 118 protocol The C37 118 s...

Page 144: ... one instance of PMUREPORT PMUREPORT1 is shown Note that connection of different signals to the PMUREPORT in this figure is only an example and the actual connections and reported signals on the IEEEC37 118 1344 can be defined by the user IEC140000146 1 en vsd PHASOR1 PHASOR2 PHASOR32 ANALOG1 ANALOG2 ANALOG24 FREQTRIG DFDTTRIG MAGHIGHTRIG MAGLOWTRIG BINARY1 BINARY2 BINARY24 PMUREPORT1 SMAI SMMI ME...

Page 145: ...rly estimate the magnitude and the phase angle of measured current and voltage phasors in this wide frequency range One of the important functions of a PMU is reporting a very accurate system frequency to the PDC client In RES670 each of the PMUREPORT instances is able to report an accurate frequency Each voltage connected preprocessor block SMAI block delivers the frequency data derived from the ...

Page 146: ...0 Freq ref not available 1 Freq ref error 2 Freq ref available Frequency reference channel error FREQTRIG BOOLEAN Frequency trigger DFDTTRIG BOOLEAN Rate of change of frequency trigger MAGHIGHTRIG BOOLEAN Magnitude high trigger MAGLOWTRIG BOOLEAN Magnitude low trigger 6 2 7 2 Reporting filters The PMUREPORT function block implements the reporting filters designed to avoid aliasing as the reporting...

Page 147: ...t floating value to a new 16 bit integer value In such a case in order to optimize the resolution of the reported analog data the user defined analog scaling is implemented in RES670 The analog scaling in RES670 is automatically calculated by use of the user defined parameters AnalogXRange for the respective analog channel X The analog data value on the input X will have a range between AnalogXRan...

Page 148: ...es The server uses CFG 3 scale factor to scale the analog data values As a result the clients which use scale factors in CFG 3 in order to recalculate analog values will get a better resolution than using the scale factors in CFG 2 The following examples show how the scale factor is calculated in RES670 Example 1 3277 0 AnalogXRange IECEQUATION2446 V1 EN The scale factor is calculated as follows 3...

Page 149: ...nsfer requirements of IEEE C37 118 2 2011 There are two types of internal current transformer cores in RES670 protection and measuring cores Using the measuring cores RES670 is compliant with all the synchrophasor measurement requirements If using the protection core for the signal magnitude current steady state test mentioned in Table 3 of IEEE C37 118 1 2011 standard the compliancy to the standa...

Page 150: ...144 ...

Page 151: ...ts Power swing detection function ZMRPSB 68 is used to detect power swings and initiate block of all distance protection zones Occurrence of ground fault currents during a power swing inhibits the ZMRPSB 68 function to allow fault clearance 7 1 3 Function block ANSI06000264 2 en vsd ZMRPSB 68 I3P V3P BLOCK BLK_SS BLK_I0 BLK1PH REL1PH BLK2PH REL2PH I0CHECK TRSP EXT_PSD PICKUP ZOUT ZIN ANSI06000264 ...

Page 152: ...ping command issued by tripping function EXT_PSD BOOLEAN 0 Input for external detection of power swing Table 78 ZMRPSB 68 Output signals Name Type Description PICKUP BOOLEAN Power swing detected ZOUT BOOLEAN Measured impedance within outer impedance boundary ZIN BOOLEAN Measured impedance within inner impedance boundary 7 1 5 Settings Table 79 ZMRPSB 68 Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit ...

Page 153: ...f initial power swing tP2 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 015 Timer for detection of subsequent power swings tW 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 250 Waiting timer for activation of tP2 timer tH 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 500 Timer for holding power swing PICKUP output tR1 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 300 Timer giving delay to inhibit by the residual current tR2 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 2 000 Timer giving delay to inhibit at very ...

Page 154: ...Fw R1FInRv RLdInRv RLdOutRv X1InFw X1OutFw ZL R1LIn X1InRv X1OutRv ANSI05000175 2 en vsd DFw j j j DRv DRv DRv DRv DRv DFw DFw DFw DFw DFw ANSI05000175 V2 EN Figure 36 Operating characteristic for ZMRPSB 68 function setting parameters in italic The impedance measurement within ZMRPSB 68 function is performed by solving equation 3 and equation 4 Typical equations are for phase A similar equations a...

Page 155: ...ed to get a better adaptation to the distance measuring zones The angle is the same as the line angle and derived from the setting of the reactive reach inner boundary X1InFw and the line resistance for the inner boundary R1LIn The fault resistance coverage for the inner boundary is set by the parameter R1FInFw From the setting parameter RLdOutFw and the calculated value RLdInFw a distance between...

Page 156: ... lines outside the load encroachment is the same as the tilted lines in the first quadrant The distance between the inner and outer boundary is the same as for the load encroachment in reverse direction that is DRv 7 1 6 3 Reactive reach in forward and reverse direction The inner characteristic for the reactive reach in forward direction correspond to the setting parameter X1InFw and the outer bou...

Page 157: ... internal signals calculated by ZMRPSB 68 function The tP1 timer in figure 37 serve as detection of initial power swings which are usually not as fast as the later swings are The tP2 timer become activated for the detection of the consecutive swings if the measured impedance exit the operate area and returns within the time delay set on the tW waiting timer The upper part of figure 37 internal inp...

Page 158: ...ET1of3 int DET2of3 int AND AND AND OR OR ANSI01000057 V2 EN Figure 38 Detection of power swing for 1 of 3 and 2 of 3 operating mode Section 7 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Impedance protection 152 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 159: ...wer swing detection function ZMRPSB 68 The internal signals DET1of3 and DET2of3 relate to the detailed logic diagrams in figure 37 and figure 38 respectively Selection of the operating mode is possible by the proper configuration of the functional input signals REL1PH BLK1PH REL2PH and BLK2PH The load encroachment characteristic can be switched off by setting the parameter OperationLdCh Disabled b...

Page 160: ...nal input I0CHECK appears within the time delay set on tGF timer and the impedance has been seen within the outer characteristic of ZMRPSB 68 operate characteristic in all three phases This function prevents the operation of ZMRPSB 68 function in cases when the circuit breaker closes onto persistent single pole fault after single pole autoreclosing dead time if the initial single pole fault and si...

Page 161: ...ep up power transformer If the center of oscillation is found to be further out in the power system in zone 2 more than one pole slip is usually allowed before the generator transformer unit is disconnected A parameter settingis availableto takeintoaccountthecircuitbreakeropeningtime Ifthereareseveral out of step relays in the power system then the one which finds the center of oscillation in its ...

Page 162: ...peration in generating direction BLKMOT BOOLEAN 0 Block operation in motor direction EXTZ1 BOOLEAN 0 Extension of zone1 reach to zone2 settings Table 84 OOSPPAM 78 Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip issued when either zone 1 or zone 2 trip TRIPZ1 BOOLEAN Zone 1 trip TRIPZ2 BOOLEAN Zone 2 trip PICKUP BOOLEAN Set when measured impedance enters lens characteristic GENMODE B...

Page 163: ...opening time use default 0s value if it is unknown Table 86 OOSPPAM 78 Group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description NoOfSlipsZ1 1 20 1 1 Number of pole slips in zone 1 required for zone 1 trip NoOfSlipsZ2 1 60 1 3 Number of pole slips in zone 2 required for zone 2 trip tReset 1 000 60 000 s 0 001 6 000 Time without any slip required to completely reset function Table 87 ...

Page 164: ... data Name Type Values Range Unit Description CURRENT REAL A Magnitude of the measured positive sequence current in A VOLTAGE REAL kV Magnitude of the measured positive sequence voltage in V R REAL Real part of measured positive sequence impedance of VBase sqrt 3 IBase X REAL Imaginary part of measured positive seq impedance of VBase sqrt 3 IBase SLIPFREQ REAL Hz Slip frequency in Hz ROTORANG REAL...

Page 165: ...mplex impedance Z R X for a typical case of generator losing step after a short circuit that was not cleared fast enough Under typical normal load conditions when the protected generator supplies the active and the reactive power to the power system the complex impedance Z R X is in the 1st quadrant point 0 in Figure 41 One can see that under a three phase fault conditions the centre of oscillatio...

Page 166: ...lex impedance Z R X crosses the impedance line SE RE It then changes the sign and continues from 180 degrees to 0 degrees and so on Figure 42 shows the rotor power angle and the magnitude of Z R X against time for the case from Figure 41 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 Time in millis econds Impe dance Z in Ohm and rotor a ngle in radian Z in Ohms angle in rad normal load fault 5...

Page 167: ...osition point 0 or near 7 2 7 1 Lens characteristic A precondition in order to be able to construct a suitable lens characteristic is that the power system in which OOSPPAM 78 is installed is modeled as a two machine equivalent system or as a single machine infinite bus equivalent power system Then the impedances from the position of OOSPPAM 78 in the direction of the normal load flow that is from...

Page 168: ...10000112 V1 EN Figure 44 Construction of the lens characteristic for a power system ANSI10000113 1 en vsd d Y Generator 13 8 kV 13 8 kV Power line 220 kV Infinite power system Out Of Step protection OOSPPAM 13 8 220 kV REG ForwardZ ForwardR ForwardX ReverseR Rg ForwardR Rtr Rline Req ReverseX Xd ForwardX Xtr Xline Xeq All impedances must be referred to the generator voltage 13 8 kV SE RE Generator...

Page 169: ...orwardX ReverseX ForwardR ReverseR determines the inclination of the Z line connecting the point SE Sending End and RE Receiving End and is typically approximately 85 degrees While the length of the Z line depends on the values of ForwardX ReverseX ForwardR and ReverseR the width of the lens is a function of the setting PickupAngle The lens is broader for smaller values of the PickupAngle and beco...

Page 170: ...re 41 and Figure 43 are always possible to draw by means of the analog output data from the pole slip function and are of great help with eventual investigations of the performance of the out of step function 7 2 7 3 Maximum slip frequency A pole slip may be detected if it has a slip frequency lower than a maximum value fsMax The specific value of fsMax depends on the setting parameter PickupAngle...

Page 171: ...out of step conditions can be even greater that those for a three phase short circuit on generator terminals see Figure 47 The currents flowing are highest at rotor angle 180 degrees and smallest at 0 degrees where relatively small currents flow To open the circuit breaker at 180 degrees when not only the currents are highest but the two internal that is induced voltages at both ends are in opposi...

Page 172: ...hen the trip command is given If specified tBreaker 0 for example tBreaker 0 040 second then automatically the TripAngle is ignored and the second more exact method applied 0 6 0 4 0 2 0 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 0 4 0 2 0 0 2 0 4 0 6 Real part R of Z in Ohms Imaginary part X of Z in Ohms R Ohm no trip region loci of Z R X no trip region rotor angle 180 X Ohm RE Receiving End infinite bus this circle is loc...

Page 173: ... well be read as outputs are only calculated if the Z R X enters the limit of reach zone which is a circle in the complex R X plane When the complex impedance Z R X enters the limit of reach region the algorithm determines in which direction the impedance Z moves that is the direction the lens is traversed measures the time taken to traverse the lens from one side to the other one If the traverse ...

Page 174: ...PSIM Z R X Z R X within limit of reach X NO Return YES Z R X within lens characteristic NO YES Z R X entered lens from Function alert RIGHT LEFT Z R X exited lens on the left hand side NO YES YES pole slip Was traverse time more than 50 ms Motor losing step Generator losing step NO X R Calculation of positive sequence active power P reactive power Q rotor angle ROTORANG and UCOSPHI P Q ROTORANG 1 ...

Page 175: ...51 67 has independent inverse time delay settings for steps 1 to 4 All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are available together with an optional user defined time characteristic The directional function needs voltage as it is voltage polarized with memory The function can be set to be directional or non directional independently for each of the steps A second harmonic blocking level can be...

Page 176: ...U_ST1_B PU_ST1_C PU_ST2_A PU_ST2_B PU_ST2_C PU_ST3_A PU_ST3_B PU_ST3_C PU_ST4_A PU_ST4_B PU_ST4_C 2NDHARM DIR_A DIR_B DIR_C ANSI06000187 V2 EN Figure 49 OC4PTOC 51_67 function block 8 1 4 Signals Table 91 OC4PTOC 51_67 Input signals Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for current input V3P GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for voltage input BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function Table c...

Page 177: ...m phase A TR_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase B TR_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase C TRST1_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase A TRST1_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase B TRST1_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase C TRST2_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase A TRST2_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase B TRST2_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase C TRST3_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from...

Page 178: ...OOLEAN Pickup signal from step4 phase B PU_ST4_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step4 phase C PU2NDHARM BOOLEAN Second harmonic detected DIR_A INTEGER Direction for phase A DIR_B INTEGER Direction for phase B DIR_C INTEGER Direction for phase C 8 1 5 Settings Table 93 OC4PTOC 51_67 Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation Disabl...

Page 179: ...tep 1 IMin1 1 10000 IB 1 100 Minimum operate current for step1 in of IBase t1Min 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 MultPU1 1 0 10 0 0 1 2 0 Multiplier for current operate level for step 1 DirModeSel2 Disabled Non directional Forward Reverse Non directional Directional mode of step 2 Disabled Nondir Forward Reverse Characterist2 ANSI Ext inv ANSI Very inv...

Page 180: ...nv L T V inv L T inv IEC Norm inv IEC Very inv IEC inv IEC Ext inv IEC S T inv IEC L T inv IEC Def Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type ANSI Def Time Selection of time delay curve type for step 3 Pickup3 5 2500 IB 1 250 Operating phase current level for step 3 in of IBase t3 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 800 Def time delay or add time delay for inverse char of step 3 TD3 0 05 999 00 0 01 0 05 Time ...

Page 181: ...e curves for step 4 MultPU4 1 0 10 0 0 1 2 0 Multiplier for current operate level for step 4 Table 94 OC4PTOC 51_67 Group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description PUMinOpPhSel 1 100 IB 1 7 Minimum current for phase selection in of IBase 2ndHarmStab 5 100 IB 1 20 Operate level of 2nd harmonic curr in of fundamental curr ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset Insta...

Page 182: ...ameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2 tPRCrv2 0 005 3 000 0 001 0 500 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 2 tTRCrv2 0 005 100 000 0 001 13 500 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 2 tCRCrv2 0 1 10 0 0 1 1 0 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 2 HarmBlock2 Disabled Enabled Disabled Enable block of step 2 for harmonic restraint Reset...

Page 183: ... 4 tBCrv4 0 00 20 00 0 01 0 00 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 4 tCCrv4 0 1 10 0 0 1 1 0 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 4 tPRCrv4 0 005 3 000 0 001 0 500 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 4 tTRCrv4 0 005 100 000 0 001 13 500 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 4 tCRCrv4 0 1 10 0 0 1 1 0 Parameter CR for customer progr...

Page 184: ...1850 Ed 2 settings PU3_MaxEd2Set 5 2500 IB 1 2500 Maximum settable operating phase current level for step 3 in of IBase for 61850 Ed 2 settings PU4_MinEd2Set 5 2500 IB 1 5 Minimum settable operating phase current level for step 4 in of IBase for 61850 Ed 2 settings PU4_MaxEd2Set 5 2500 IB 1 2500 Maximum settable operating phase current level for step 4 in of IBase for 61850 Ed 2 settings 8 1 6 Mon...

Page 185: ...e Non directional Forward Reverse The protection design can be divided into four parts The direction element The harmonic restraint blocking function The four step over current function The mode selection If VT inputs are not available or not connected setting parameter DirModeSelx shall be left to default value Non directional 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 8 Current protection Phasor measurement uni...

Page 186: ...setting MeasType within the general settings for the four step phase overcurrent protection 1 and 3 phase output function OC4PTOC 51 67 it is possible to select the type of the measurement used for all overcurrent stages It is possible to select either discrete Fourier filter DFT or true RMS filter RMS If DFT option is selected then only the RMS value of the fundamental frequency components of eac...

Page 187: ...monic restrain of the function can be chosen A set 2nd harmonic current in relation to the fundamental current is used The 2nd harmonic current is taken from the pre processing of the phase currents and the relation is compared to a set restrain current level The function can be directional The direction of the fault current is given as current angle in relation to the voltage angle The fault curr...

Page 188: ...ms or until the positive sequence voltage is restored After 100 ms the following occurs If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current between 10 and 30 of the set terminal rated current IBase the condition seals in If the fault has caused tripping the trip endures If the fault was detected in the reverse direction the measuring element in the reverse direction remain...

Page 189: ...Uref Idir RCA ROA Forward Reverse ROA en05000745 vsd IEC05000745 V1 EN 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 8 Current protection Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 183 Technical manual ...

Page 190: ...ive phases if their current amplitudes are higher than the pickup level PUMinOpPhSel and the direction of the current is according to the set direction of the step If no blockings are given the pickup signals will start the timers of the step The time characteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or inverse time characteristic A wide range of standardized inverse time character...

Page 191: ...Selx Disabled DirModeSelx Non directional DirModeSelx Forward DirModeSelx Reverse AND AND FORWARD_Int REVERSE_Int OR OR STAGEx_DIR_Int ANSI12000008 3 en vsd AND AND Characteristx Inverse Inverse ANSI12000008 3 en vsd 0 0 tx 0 0 txMin PUx ANSI12000008 V3 EN Figure 52 Simplified logic diagram for OC4PTOC 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 8 Current protection Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 185 Tech...

Page 192: ...switching state The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK The pickup signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLK The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR A harmonic restrain of the Four step overcurrent protection function OC4PTOC 51_67 can be chosen If the ratio of the 2nd harmonic component in relation to the fundamental f...

Page 193: ...gle RCA 40 0 65 0 degrees 2 0 degrees Relay operating angle ROA 40 0 89 0 degrees 2 0 degrees Second harmonic blocking 5 100 of fundamental 2 0 of In Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset step 1 4 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 35 ms whichever is greater Minimum trip time for inverse curves step 1 4 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 35 ms whichever is greater Inverse time characteristics see table 692 table 693 and ...

Page 194: ...n EF4PTOC 4 IN 4 alt 4 TEF REVA V2 EN 51N_67N 8 2 2 Functionality The four step residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOC 51N 67N has an inverse or definite time delay independent for each step All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an optional user defined characteristic EF4PTOC 51N 67N can be set directional or non directional independently for each of the steps ...

Page 195: ...2 3 Function block EF4PTOC 51N_67N I3P V3P I3PPOL I3PDIR BLOCK BLKTR BLK1 BLK2 BLK3 BLK4 MULTPU1 MULTPU2 MULTPU3 MULTPU4 52A CLOSECMD OPENCMD TRIP TRST1 TRST2 TRST3 TRST4 TRSOTF PICKUP PUST1 PUST2 PUST3 PUST4 PUSOTF PUFW PUREV 2NDHARMD ANSI06000424 4 en vsd ANSI06000424 V4 EN Figure 55 EF4PTOC 51N 67N function block 8 2 4 Signals Table 99 EF4PTOC 51N_67N Input signals Name Type Default Description...

Page 196: ...n CLOSECMD BOOLEAN 0 Breaker close command OPENCMD BOOLEAN 0 Breaker open command Table 100 EF4PTOC 51N_67N Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal TRST1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1 TRST2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2 TRST3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 3 TRST4 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 4 TRSOTF BOOLEAN Trip signal from switch onto fault function PICKUP BOOL...

Page 197: ...rmonic curr in of fundamental curr BlkParTransf Disabled Enabled Disabled Enable blocking at energizing of parallel transformers Use_PUValue ST1 ST2 ST3 ST4 ST4 Current pickup blocking at parallel transf step1 2 3 or 4 SOTF Disabled SOTF UnderTime SOTF UnderTime Disabled SOTF operation mode Off SOTF Undertime SOTF Undertime SOTFSel Open Closed CloseCommand Open Select signal to activate SOTF CB Op...

Page 198: ...0 Def time delay or add time delay for inverse char of step 1 TD1 0 05 999 00 0 01 0 05 Time multiplier for the step 1 selected time characteristic IMin1 1 00 10000 00 IB 1 00 100 00 Minimum operate residual current for step 1 in of IBase t1Min 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Minimum operate time for inverse time characteristic step 1 MultPU1 1 0 10 0 0 1 2 0 Multiplier for the residual current setting...

Page 199: ...2 TD2 0 05 999 00 0 01 0 05 Time multiplier for the step 2 selected time characteristic IMin2 1 00 10000 00 IB 1 00 50 Minimum operate residual current for step 2 in of IBase t2Min 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Minimum operate time for inverse time characteristic step 2 MultPU2 1 0 10 0 0 1 2 0 Multiplier for the residual current setting value for step 2 HarmBlock2 Disabled Enabled Enabled Enable blo...

Page 200: ...3 TD3 0 05 999 00 0 01 0 05 Time multiplier for the step 3 selected time characteristic IMin3 1 00 10000 00 IB 1 00 33 Minimum operate residual current for step 3 in of IBase t3Min 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Minimum operate time for inverse time characteristic step 3 MultPU3 1 0 10 0 0 1 2 0 Multiplier for the residual current setting value for step 3 HarmBlock3 Disabled Enabled Enabled Enable blo...

Page 201: ...acteristic step 4 MultPU4 1 0 10 0 0 1 2 0 Multiplier for the residual current setting value for step 4 HarmBlock4 Disabled Enabled Enabled Enable block of step 4 for harmonic restraint Table 102 EF4PTOC 51N_67N Group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset Instantaneous Reset curve type for step1 Instantaneous IEC ANSI tRe...

Page 202: ...for customized inverse reset time curve for step 2 tCRCrv2 0 1 10 0 0 1 1 0 Param CR for customized inverse reset time curve for step 2 ResetTypeCrv3 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset Instantaneous Reset curve type for step3 Instantaneous IEC ANSI tReset3 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 020 Reset time delay for step 3 tPCrv3 0 005 3 000 0 001 1 000 Param P for customized inverse trip time curve for step 3...

Page 203: ...Sel 1 12 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups SeqTypeIDir Zero seq Neg seq Zero seq Choice of measurand for directional current SeqTypeIPol Zero seq Neg seq Zero seq Choice of measurand for polarizing current SeqTypeVPol Zero seq Neg seq Zero seq Choice of measurand for polarizing voltage Table 104 EF4PTOC 51N_67N Non group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Desc...

Page 204: ...arizing angle between voltage and current IPOLIANG REAL deg Polarizing current angle 8 2 7 Operation principle This function has the following three Analog Inputs on its function block in the configuration tool 1 I3P input used for Operating Quantity Supply the zero sequence magnitude measuring functionality 2 V3P input used for Voltage Polarizing Quantity Supply either zero or negative sequence v...

Page 205: ...nnected to EF4PTOC 51N 67N function Analog Input I3P is not connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in PCM600 In such case the pre processing block will calculate 3I0 from the first three inputs into the pre processing block by using the following formula will take I2 from SMAI AI3P connected to I3PDIR input which was connected to I3P input also If zero sequence current is selected op I 3 Io ...

Page 206: ...g function input V3P is NOT connected to a dedicated VT input of the IED in PCM600 In such case the pre processing block will calculate 3V2 from the first three inputs into the pre processing block by using the following formula VPol 3V0 VA VB VC EQUATION2012 V1 EN Equation 16 where VA VB VC are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages In order to use this all three phase t...

Page 207: ...t into the pre processing block connected to EF4PTOC 51N 67N function analog input I3PPOL is NOT connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in PCM600 In such case the pre processing block will calculate 3I0 from the first three inputs into the pre processing block by using the following formula 3 Pol I Io IA IB IC EQUATION2019 ANSI V1 EN Equation 18 where IA IB and IC are fundamental frequency p...

Page 208: ...tions if available in the IED 1 Distance protection directional function 2 Negative sequence polarized General current and voltage multi purpose protection function 8 2 7 4 Directional detection for ground fault function Zero sequence components will be used for detecting directionality for ground fault function In some cases zero sequence quantities might detect directionality wrong Negative sequ...

Page 209: ...aracteristic inverse or definite time By this parameter setting it is possible to select inverse or definite time delay for the ground fault protection Most of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse characteristics are available For the complete list of available inverse curves please refer to section Inverse characteristics Type of reset characteristic Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI Reset By this parame...

Page 210: ...blocked from the binary input BLKx The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR 8 2 7 8 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison function It shall be noted that at least one of the four residual overcurrent steps shall be set as directional in order to enable execution of the directional supervision element and the integrated direction...

Page 211: ...or reverse release of measuring steps Characteristic for forward release of measuring steps RCA 85 deg ANSI11000243 1 en ai Operating area Operating area ANSI11000243 V1 EN Figure 57 Operating characteristic for ground fault directional element using the zero sequence components Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are Directional element will be internally enabled t...

Page 212: ...erating quantity magnitude Iop x cos φ AngleRCA is bigger than 60 of setting parameter IDirPU and directional supervision element detects fault in reverse direction These signals shall be used for communication based ground fault teleprotection communication schemes permissive or blocking Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison step is sh...

Page 213: ...irectional comparison step 8 2 7 9 Second harmonic blocking element A harmonic restrain of four step residual overcurrent protection function EF4PTOC can be chosen for each step by a parameter setting HarmRestrainx If the ratio of the 2nd harmonic component in relation to the fundamental frequency component in the residual current exceeds the preset level defined by parameter 2ndHarmStab then ST2N...

Page 214: ...f the transformer in service before the parallel transformer energizing is a little delayed compared to the first transformer Therefore we have high 2nd harmonic current component initially After a short period this current is however small and the normal 2nd harmonic blocking resets If the BlkParTransf function is activated the 2nd harmonic restrain signal is latched as long as the residual curre...

Page 215: ...e setting parameter SOTF is set to activate either SOTF or Under Time logic or both When the circuit breaker is closing there is a risk to close it onto a permanent fault for example during an autoreclosing sequence The SOTF logic will enable fast fault clearance during such situations The time during which SOTF and Under Time logics will be active after activation is defined by the setting parame...

Page 216: ...rom change in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker close and open command pulses This selection is done by setting parameter ActUnderTime In case of a pickup from step 4 this logic will give a trip after a set delay tUnderTime This delay is normally set to a relatively short time default 300 ms Practically the Under Time logic acts as circuit breaker pole discrepancy protection but it ...

Page 217: ...s or cmd Element 3I0 DirModeSel DirModeSel INPol ANSI06000376 V1 EN Figure 61 Functional overview of EF4PTOC 51N 67N 8 2 8 Technical data Table 106 EF4PTOC 51N 67N technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Trip current step 1 4 1 2500 of lBase 1 0 of In at I In 1 0 of I at I In Reset ratio 95 at 10 2500 of lBase Relay characteristic angle RCA 180 to 180 degrees 2 0 degrees Trip current for d...

Page 218: ...pickup non directional at 0 to 2 x Iset Min 15 ms Max 30 ms Reset time pickup non directional at 2 to 0 x Iset Min 15 ms Max 30 ms Trip time pickup non directional at 0 to 10 x Iset Min 5 ms Max 20 ms Reset time pickup non directional at 10 to 0 x Iset Min 20 ms Max 35 ms Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset Impulse margin time 15 ms typically 8 3 Four step directional negative p...

Page 219: ... to provide a system backup for example in the case of the primary protection being out of service due to communication or voltage transformer circuit failure Directional operation can be combined together with corresponding communication logic in permissive or blocking teleprotection scheme The same logic as for directional zero sequence current can be used Current reversal and weak end infeed fu...

Page 220: ...ickup multiplier is in use for step2 MULTPU3 BOOLEAN 0 When activated the pickup multiplier is in use for step3 MULTPU4 BOOLEAN 0 When activated the pickup multiplier is in use for step4 Table 108 NS4PTOC 46I2 Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal TRST1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1 TRST2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2 TRST3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 3 TRST4 ...

Page 221: ...SI Def Time L T E inv L T V inv L T inv IEC Norm inv IEC Very inv IEC inv IEC Ext inv IEC S T inv IEC L T inv IEC Def Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type ANSI Def Time Time delay characteristic for step 1 I2 1 1 2500 IB 1 100 Negative sequence current op level for step 1 in of IBase t1 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Time delay of step 1 when definite time char is selected TD1 0 05 999 00 0 01 0...

Page 222: ...op level for step 2 in of IBase t2 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 400 Time delay of step 2 when definite time char is selected TD2 0 05 999 00 0 01 0 05 Time multiplier for the step 2 selected time characteristic IMin2 1 00 10000 00 IB 1 00 50 Minimum current for step 2 t2Min 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Minimum operate time for inverse time characteristic step 2 MultPU2 1 0 10 0 0 1 2 0 Multiplier for scal...

Page 223: ...IMin3 1 00 10000 00 IB 1 00 33 Minimum current for step 3 t3Min 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Minimum operate time for inverse time characteristic step 3 MultPU3 1 0 10 0 0 1 2 0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 3 DirModeSel4 Disabled Non directional Forward Reverse Non directional Directional mode of step 4 Disabled Nondir Forward Reverse Characterist4 ANSI Ext inv ANSI Very...

Page 224: ...0 005 200 000 0 001 13 500 Param A for customized inverse trip time curve for step 1 tBCrv1 0 00 20 00 0 01 0 00 Param B for customized inverse trip time curve for step 1 tCCrv1 0 1 10 0 0 1 1 0 Param C for customized inverse trip time curve for step 1 tPRCrv1 0 005 3 000 0 001 0 500 Param PR for customized inverse reset time curve for step 1 tTRCrv1 0 005 100 000 0 001 13 500 Param TR for customi...

Page 225: ... 0 500 Param PR for customized inverse reset time curve for step 3 tTRCrv3 0 005 100 000 0 001 13 500 Param TR for customized inverse reset time curve for step 3 tCRCrv3 0 1 10 0 0 1 1 0 Param CR for customized inverse reset time curve for step 3 ResetTypeCrv4 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset Instantaneous Reset curve type for step4 Instantaneous IEC ANSI tReset4 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 020 Reset...

Page 226: ...ed for Operating Quantity 2 V3P input used for Polarizing Quantity 3 I3PDIR input used for Directional finding These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre processing function blocks in the Configuration Tool within PCM600 8 3 7 1 Operating quantity within the function Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC 46I2 function always uses negative sequence current I2 for its...

Page 227: ...tion to the fault Forward Reverse Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC 4612 function uses the voltage polarizing method NS4PTOC 4612 uses the negative sequence voltage V2 as polarizing quantity V3P This voltage is calculated from three phase voltage input within the IED The pre processing block calculates V2 from the first three inputs into the pre processing block by using t...

Page 228: ...unication based negative sequence protection schemes permissive or blocking Each part is described separately in the following sections 8 3 7 5 Four negative sequence overcurrent stages Each overcurrent stage uses Operating Quantity I2 negative sequence current as measuring quantity Every of the four overcurrent stage has the following built in facilities Operating mode Disabled Non directional Fo...

Page 229: ...l binary signal By this parameter setting it is possible to increase negative sequence current pickup value when function binary input MULTPUx has logical value 1 Simplified logic diagram for one negative sequence overcurrent stage is shown in the following figure ANSI09000684 V1 EN Figure 63 Simplified logic diagram for negative sequence overcurrent stage x where x 1 2 3 or 4 NS4PTOC 4612 can be ...

Page 230: ... of the fault AngleRCA Forward Area Iop I2 Vpol V2 Reverse Area ANSI10000031 1 en vsd ANSI10000031 V1 EN Figure 64 Operating characteristic for fault directional element Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are Directional element is internally enable to trip as soon as Iop is bigger than 40 of INDirPU and the directional condition is fulfilled in set direction Relay...

Page 231: ...iagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison step is shown in figure 58 X a a b b IDirPU polMethod Voltage polMethod Dual OR FORWARD_Int REVERSE_Int BLOCK STAGE1_DIR_Int 0 6 X 0 4 AND STAGE3_DIR_Int STAGE4_DIR_Int STAGE2_DIR_Int OR PUREV VPolMin IPolMin AngleRCA T F 0 0 X T F RNPol XNPol 0 0 Directional Characteristic FWD RVS AND AND AND PUFW FORWARD_Int REVERS...

Page 232: ...ease 1 100 of IBase For RCA 60 degrees 2 5 of In at I In 2 5 of I at I In Minimum polarizing voltage 1 100 of VBase 0 5 of Vn Minimum polarizing current 2 100 of IBase 1 0 of In Real part of negative sequence source impedance used for current polarization 0 50 1000 00 W phase Imaginary part of negative sequence source impedance used for current polarization 0 50 3000 00 W phase Trip time pickup no...

Page 233: ...le φ Directional residual power can also be used to detect and give selective trip of phase to ground faults in high impedance grounded networks The protection uses the residual power component 3I0 3V0 cos φ where φ is the angle between the residual current and the reference residual voltage compensated with a characteristic angle A normal non directional residual current function can also be used...

Page 234: ...nd fault currents In such networks the active fault current would be small and by using sensitive directional residual power protection the operating quantity is elevated Therefore better possibility to detect ground faults In addition in low impedance grounded networks the inverse time characteristic gives better time selectivity in case of high zero resistive fault currents Phase currents Phase ...

Page 235: ... Blocks the Non directional current residual outputs BLKVN BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the Non directional voltage residual outputs Table 115 SDEPSDE 67N Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN General trip of the function TRDIRIN BOOLEAN Trip of the directional residual over current function TRNDIN BOOLEAN Trip of non directional residual over current TRVN BOOLEAN Trip of non directional residual ...

Page 236: ...Relay open angle ROA used as release in phase mode in deg INCosPhiPU 0 25 200 00 IB 0 01 1 00 Set level for 3I0cosFi directional res over current in of IBase SN_PU 0 25 200 00 SB 0 01 10 00 Set level for 3I03U0cosFi starting inv time count in of SBase INDirPU 0 25 200 00 IB 0 01 5 00 Set level for directional residual over current prot in of IBase tDef 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 100 Definite time dela...

Page 237: ... release current for all directional modes in of IBase VNRelPU 1 00 300 00 VB 0 01 3 00 Residual release voltage for all direction modes in of UBase Table 117 SDEPSDE 67N Group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description tReset 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 040 Time delay used for reset of definite timers in sec tPCrv 0 005 3 000 0 001 1 000 Setting P for customer programmable curve...

Page 238: ...A Measured magnitude of residual power 3I03V0cos Fi RCA ANG FI RCA REAL deg Angle between 3V0 and 3I0 minus RCA Fi RCA 8 4 7 Operation principle 8 4 7 1 Function inputs The function is using phasors of the residual current and voltage Group signals I3P and V3P containing phasors of residual current and voltage are taken from pre processor blocks The sensitive directional ground fault protection ha...

Page 239: ...faulted feeder only RCADir is set equal to 90 in an isolated network as all currents are mainly capacitive The function operates when 3I0 cos φ gets larger than the set value 3V0 Vref 3I0 RCA 0 ROA 90 ang 3I0 ang 3Vref 3I0 cos en06000648_ansi vsd Vref ANSI06000648 V1 EN Figure 68 RCADir set to 0 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 8 Current protection Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 233 Technical m...

Page 240: ...binary input BLKTRDIR When the function picks up binary output signals PICKUP and PUDIRIN are activated If the output signals PICKUP and PUDIRIN remain active for the set delay tDef the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN get activated The trip from this sub function has definite time delay ROADir is Relay Operating Angle ROADir is identifying a window around the reference direction in order to...

Page 241: ...icates forward reverse direction to the fault Reverse direction is defined as 3I0 cos φ 180 the set value It is also possible to tilt the characteristic to compensate for current transformer angle error with a setting RCAComp as shown in the Figure 71 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 8 Current protection Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 235 Technical manual ...

Page 242: ... Vref The function operates when 3I0 3V0 cos φ gets larger than the set value SN Refer to the simplified logical diagram in Figure 73 For trip the residual power 3I0 3V0 cos φ the residual current 3I0 and the release voltage 3V0 shall be larger than the set levels SN_PU INRelPU and VNRelPU Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR When the function picks up binary outpu...

Page 243: ...l current protection measuring 3I0 and φ The function will operate if the residual current is larger than the set value and the angle φ ang 3I0 ang Vref is within the sector RCADir ROADir Vref 3V0 Operate area 3I0 RCA 0º ROA 80º ANSI06000652 2 en vsd ANSI06000652 V2 EN Figure 72 Example of characteristic For trip Residual current 3I0 shall be larger than bothINRelPU and INDirPU and residual voltag...

Page 244: ...ts This function can serve as alternative or backup to distance protection with phase preference logic To assure selectivity the distance protection can block the non directional ground fault current function via the input BLKNDN The non directional function is using the calculated residual current derived as sum of the phase currents This will give a better ability to detect cross country faults ...

Page 245: ... signals TRIP and TRUN get activated A simplified logical diagram of the total function is shown in Figure 73 en06000653_ansi vsd INNonDirPU UN_PU OpMODE INcosPhi Pickup_N INCosPhiPU OpMODE INVNCosPhi INVNCosPhiPU Phi in RCA ROA OpMODE IN and Phi DirMode Forw Forw DirMode Rev Rev PUNDIN TRNDIN PUVN TRVN AND AND AND OR AND AND AND OR PUDIRIN PUFW PUREV 0 t 0 t 0 0 TimeChar DefTime TRDIRIN AND SN t ...

Page 246: ...ctional residual overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset Min 40 ms Max 65 ms Reset time for non directional residual overcurrent at 2 to 0 x Iset Min 40 ms Max 65 ms Trip time for directional residual overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset Min 110 ms Max 160 ms Reset time for directional residual overcurrent at 2 to 0 x Iset Min 20 ms Max 60 ms Independent time delay for non directional residual overvoltage at 0 8 to ...

Page 247: ... be detected by other protection functions and the introduction of the thermal overload protection can allow the protected circuit to trip closer to the thermal limits The three phase current measuring protection has an I2t characteristic with settable time constant and a thermal memory The temperature is displayed in either Celsius or Fahrenheit depending on whether the function used is Fahrenhei...

Page 248: ...OOLEAN 0 Block of trip MULTPU BOOLEAN 0 Current multiplyer used when THOL is for two or more lines AMBTEMP REAL 0 Ambient temperature from external temperature sensor SENSFLT BOOLEAN 0 Validity status of ambient temperature sensor RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of internal thermal load counter Table 123 LFPTTR 26 Input signals Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for current input BL...

Page 249: ...ues Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation Disabled Enabled TRef 0 300 Deg C 1 90 Final temperature rise above ambient of the line when loaded with IRef IRef 0 400 IB 1 100 The load current in of IBase leading to TRef temperature IMult 1 5 1 1 Current multiplier when function is used for two or more lines Tau 1 1000 Min 1 45 Time constant of the line in m...

Page 250: ...ase leading to TRef temperature IMult 1 5 1 1 Current multiplier when function is used for two or more lines Tau 1 1000 Min 1 45 Time constant of the line in minutes AlarmTemp 0 400 Deg F 1 175 Temperature level for pickup alarm TripTemp 0 600 Deg F 1 195 Temperature level for trip ReclTemp 0 600 Deg F 1 170 Temperature for reset of lockout after trip tPulse 0 05 0 30 s 0 01 0 10 Operate pulse len...

Page 251: ...ahrenheit Calculated temperature of the device TEMPAMB REAL Temperature Fahrenheit Ambient temperature used in the calculations TERMLOAD REAL Temperature relative to operate temperature 8 5 7 Operation principle The sampled analog phase currents are pre processed and for each phase current the RMS value is derived These phase current values are fed to the thermal overload protection one time const...

Page 252: ...al is the calculated final temperature with the actual current Dt is the time step between calculation of the actual temperature and t is the set thermal time constant for the protected device line or cable The actual temperature of the protected component line or cable is calculated by adding the ambient temperature to the calculated temperature as shown above The ambient temperature can be taken...

Page 253: ...70 V1 EN Equation 26 In the above equation the final temperature is equal to the set or measured ambient temperature The calculated time to reset of lockout is available as a real figure signal TENRECL This signal is enabled when the LOCKOUT output is activated In some applications the measured current can involve a number of parallel lines This is often used where one bay connects several paralle...

Page 254: ...n of time to reset of lockout Calculation of actual temperature Lockout logic AMBTEMP PICKUP TEMP TRIP LOCKOUT TTRIP TENRECL I3P ENMULT SENSFLT ALARM BLKTR BLOCK ANSI09000637 3 en vsd ANSI09000637 V3 EN Figure 75 Functional overview of LFPTTR LCPTTR 26 Section 8 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Current protection 248 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 255: ...tant t 1 1000 minutes IEC 60255 149 5 0 or 200 ms whichever is greater Alarm temperature 0 400 F 0 200 C 4 0 F 2 0 C Trip temperature 0 300 C 0 600 F 4 0 F 2 0 C Reset level temperature 0 300 C 0 600 F 4 0 F 2 0 C 8 6 Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP 37 8 6 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Directional und...

Page 256: ...ward power and reverse power protection with underpower and overpower functions respectively The underpower IED gives a higher margin and should provide better dependability On the other hand the risk for unwanted operation immediately after synchronization may be higher One should set the underpower IED to trip if the active power from the generator is less than about 2 One should set the overpow...

Page 257: ... Block of function BLOCK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 1 BLOCK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 2 Table 134 GUPPDUP 37 Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal TRIP1 BOOLEAN Trip of stage 1 TRIP2 BOOLEAN Trip of stage 2 PICKUP BOOLEAN Common pickup PICKUP1 BOOLEAN Pickup of stage 1 PICKUP2 BOOLEAN Pickup of stage 2 P REAL Active Power in MW PPERCENT REAL Active power in of SBase Q...

Page 258: ...rop off delay for stage 2 Table 136 GUPPDUP 37 Group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description TD 0 000 0 999 0 001 0 000 Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement P and Q Hysteresis1 0 2 5 0 SB 0 1 0 5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in SBase Hysteresis2 0 2 5 0 SB 0 1 0 5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in SBase IMagComp5 10 000 10 000 0 001 0 000 Amplitude correcti...

Page 259: ...Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups Mode A B C Arone Pos Seq AB BC CA A B C Pos Seq Selection of measured current and voltage 8 6 6 Monitored data Table 138 GUPPDUP 37 Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description P REAL MW Active Power in MW PPERCENT REAL Active power in of SBase Q REAL MVAr Reactive power in MVAr QPERCENT REAL Reactive power in of SBase 8 6 7 Operation prin...

Page 260: ...ent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as shown in table 139 Table 139 Complex power calculation Set value Mode Formula used for complex power calculation A B C A A B B C C S V I V I V I EQUATION2055 ANSI V1 EN Equation 28 Arone AB A BC C S V I V I EQUATION2056 ANSI V1 EN Equation 29 PosSeq 3 PosSeq PosSeq S V I EQUATION2057 ANSI V1 EN Equation 30 AB AB A B S V I I EQUATION205...

Page 261: ...he calculated power component is larger than the pick up value After a set time delay TripDelay1 2 a trip TRIP1 2 signal is activated if the pickup signal is still active At activation of any of the two stages a common signal PICKUP will be activated At trip from any of the two stages also a common signal TRIP will be activated To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power funct...

Page 262: ...om the function in previous execution cycle SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle TD is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties Default value for parameter TD is 0 00 With this value the new calculated value is immediately given out without any filtering that is without any additional delay When TD is set to value bigger than 0 the ...

Page 263: ...t and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals Analog outputs Monitored data from the function can be used for service values or in the disturbance report The active power is provided as MW value P or in percent of base power PPERCENT The reactive power is provided as Mvar value Q or in percent of b...

Page 264: ...chanical energy available as a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy Sometimes the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses Then the synchronous generator becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the power system This operating state where individual synchronous machines opera...

Page 265: ... is higher than 1 When IED with a metering class input CTs is used pickup can be set to more sensitive value e g 0 5 or even to 0 2 Underpower IED Overpower IED Q Q P P Tripping point without turbine torque Margin Margin Trip Line Trip Line Tripping point without turbine torque ANSI06000315 1 en vsd ANSI06000315 V1 EN Figure 80 Reverse power protection with underpower IED and overpower IED 8 7 3 F...

Page 266: ...wer P in of SBase Q REAL Reactive power Q in MVAr QPERCENT REAL Reactive power Q in of SBase 8 7 5 Settings Table 143 GOPPDOP 32 Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation Disabled Enabled OpMode1 Disabled OverPower OverPower Operation mode for stage 1 Off On Power1 0 0 500 0 SB 0 1 120 0 Stage 1 overpower setting in Angle1 di...

Page 267: ...000 0 001 0 000 Amplitude correction compensates current error at 5 of Ir IMagComp30 10 000 10 000 0 001 0 000 Amplitude correction compensates current error at 30 of Ir IMagComp100 10 000 10 000 0 001 0 000 Amplitude correction compensates current error at 100 of Ir VMagComp5 10 000 10 000 0 001 0 000 Amplitude correction compensates voltage error at 5 of Ur VMagComp30 10 000 10 000 0 001 0 000 A...

Page 268: ... 32 Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description P REAL MW Active power P in MW PPERCENT REAL Active power P in of SBase Q REAL MVAr Reactive power Q in MVAr QPERCENT REAL Reactive power Q in of SBase 8 7 7 Operation principle A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is shown in figure 82 The function has two stages with individual settings Section 8 1MR...

Page 269: ...The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as shown in table 147 Table 147 Complex power calculation Set value Mode Formula used for complex power calculation A B C A B C A B C S V I V I V I EQUATION2038 V1 EN Equation 38 Arone A C AB BC S V I V I EQUATION2039 V1 EN Equation 39 PosSeq PosSeq PosSeq S 3 V I EQUATION2040 V1 EN Equation 40 A B A B AB S V I I EQUATION2041 V1 ...

Page 270: ... stages a common signal PICKUP will be activated At trip from any of the two stages also a common signal TRIP will be activated To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function The absolute hysteresis of the stage1 2 is Hysteresis1 2 abs Power1 2 drop power1 2 For generator reverse power protection the power setting is very low normally down to 0 02 p u of rated generator ...

Page 271: ...ion cycle k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties Default value for parameter k is 0 00 With this value the new calculated value is immediately given out without any filtering that is without any additional delay Whenk is set to value bigger than 0 the filtering is enabled A typical value for k 0 92 in case of slow operating functions 8 7 7 2 Calibration of an...

Page 272: ...t current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals Analog outputs from the function can be used for service values or in the disturbance report The active power is provided as MW value P or in percent of base power PPERCENT The reactive power is provided as Mvar value Q or in percent of base pow...

Page 273: ...d Step 2 180 0 180 0 degrees 2 0 degrees Trip time pickup at 0 5 to 2 x Sr and k 0 000 Min 10 ms Max 25 ms Reset time pickup at 2 to 0 5 x Sr and k 0 000 Min 35 ms Max 55 ms Independent time delay to trip for Step 1 and Step 2 at 0 5 to 2 x Sn and k 0 000 0 01 6000 00 s 0 2 or 40 ms whichever is greater 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 8 Current protection Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 267 Tec...

Page 274: ...268 ...

Page 275: ...r in the power system during faults or abnormal conditions Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV 27 function can be used to open circuit breakers to prepare for system restoration at power outages or as long time delayed back up to primary protection UV2PTUV 27 has two voltage steps each with inverse or definite time delay UV2PTUV 27 has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to system serv...

Page 276: ...TR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip signal step 1 BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1 BLKTR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip signal step 2 BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2 Table 150 UV2PTUV 27 Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip TRST1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1 TRST1_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase A TRST1_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase B TRST1_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from step...

Page 277: ...haracterist1 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog inv curve Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for step 1 OpMode1 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op 1 of 3 2 of 3 3 of 3 from step 1 Pickup1 1 0 100 0 VB 0 1 70 0 Voltage pickup value Definite Time Inverse Time curve in of VBase step 1 t1 0 00 6000 00 s 0 01 5 00 Definitive time d...

Page 278: ...g in of VBase step 2 tBlkUV2 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Time delay of internal low level blocking for step 2 HystAbs2 0 0 50 0 VB 0 1 0 5 Absolute hysteresis in of VBase step 2 Table 152 UV2PTUV 27 Group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description tReset1 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 1 ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous Frozen time...

Page 279: ...mer programmable curve for step 2 DCrv2 0 000 60 000 0 001 0 000 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 2 PCrv2 0 000 3 000 0 001 1 000 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2 CrvSat2 0 100 1 0 Tuning param for prog under voltage Inverse Time curve step 2 Table 153 UV2PTUV 27 Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description ConnType PhN DFT PhPh...

Page 280: ...ase to phase fundamental value phase to ground true RMS value or phase to phase true RMS value The choice of the measuring is done by the parameter ConnType The voltage related settings are made in percent of base voltage which is set in kV phase to phase voltage This means operation for phase to ground voltage under 3 Vpickup VBase kV EQUATION1606 V1 EN Equation 48 and operation for phase to phas...

Page 281: ...B curve is described as 2 0 480 0 055 Vpickup V 32 0 5 Vpickup TD t æ ö ç è ø EQUATION1608 V1 EN Equation 51 The customer programmable curve can be created as P TD A t D Vpickup V B C Vpickup é ù ê ú ê ú ê ú æ ö ê ú ç è ø ë û EQUATION1609 V1 EN Equation 52 When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity There will be an undesired discontinuity Therefore a tu...

Page 282: ...TUV If the pickup condition with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay time and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2pickup for the inverse time the corresponding pickup output is reset Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area the pickup condition must be fulfilled again an...

Page 283: ...ed Instantaneous Measured Voltage tIReset1 ANSI05000010 3 en vsd ANSI05000010 V3 EN Figure 86 Voltage profile not causing a reset of the pickup signal for step 1 and inverse time delay at different reset types 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 9 Voltage protection Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 277 Technical manual ...

Page 284: ...stantaneous Measured Voltage tIReset1 ANSI05000011 2 en vsd ANSI05000011 V2 EN Figure 87 Voltage profile causing a reset of the pickup signal for step 1 and inverse time delay at different reset types Definite timer delay Section 9 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Voltage protection 278 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 285: ...neous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured a b a b Pickup1 V TRST1 PU_ST1 AND 0 t1 tReset1 0 R ANSI09000785 3 en vsd ANSI09000785 V3 EN Figure 88 Detailed logic diagram for step 1 DT operation Pickup1 PU_ST1 TRST1 tReset1 t1 ANSI10000039 3 en vsd ANSI10000039 V3 EN Figure 89 Example for Definite Time Delay stage1 reset 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 9 Voltage protection Phasor measureme...

Page 286: ...s below the setting of IntBlkStVal1 either the trip output of step 1 or both the trip and the PICKUP outputs of step 1 are blocked The characteristic of the blocking is set by the IntBlkSel1 parameter This internal blocking can also be set to Disabled resulting in no voltage based blocking Corresponding settings and functionality are valid also for step 2 In case of disconnection of the high volta...

Page 287: ...ges Recursive fourier filters or true RMS filters of input voltage signals are used The voltages are individually compared to the set value and the lowest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration A special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 and 3 out of 3 criteria to fulfill the PICKUP condition The design of Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV 27 is...

Page 288: ...se 2 Phase 1 Phase 3 Phase 2 Phase 1 Time integrator tIReset2 ResetTypeCrv2 Voltage Phase Selector OpMode2 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 Time integrator tIReset1 ResetTypeCrv1 Voltage Phase Selector OpMode1 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 VA VB VC TRIP TRIP OR OR OR OR OR OR PICKUP IntBlkStVal1 t1 t1Reset IntBlkStVal2 t2Reset t2 ANSI05000012 3 en vsd ANSI05000012 V3 EN Figure 92 Schematic desi...

Page 289: ...haracteristics 0 000 60 000 s 0 5 or 40ms whichever is greater Trip time pickup at 2 to 0 x Vset Min 15 ms Max 30 ms Reset time pickup at 0 to 2 x Vset Min 15 ms Max 30 ms Trip time pickup at 1 2 to 0 x Vset Min 5 ms Max 25 ms Reset time pickup at 0 to 1 2 x Vset Min 15 ms Max 35 ms Critical impulse time 5 ms typically at 1 2 to 0 x Vset Impulse margin time 15 ms typically 9 2 Two step overvoltage...

Page 290: ...igh reset ratio to allow settings close to system service voltage 9 2 3 Function block ANSI06000277 2 en vsd OV2PTOV 59 V3P BLOCK BLKTR1 BLK1 BLKTR2 BLK2 TRIP TRST1 TRST1_A TRST1_B TRST1_C TRST2 TRST2_A TRST2_B TRST2_C PICKUP PU_ST1 PU_ST1_A PU_ST1_B PU_ST1_C PU_ST2 PU_ST2_A PU_ST2_B PU_ST2_C ANSI06000277 V2 EN Figure 93 OV2PTOV 59 function block 9 2 4 Signals Table 156 OV2PTOV 59 Input signals Na...

Page 291: ...AN Pickup signal from step2 phase A PU_ST2_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step2 phase B PU_ST2_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step2 phase C 9 2 5 Settings Table 158 OV2PTOV 59 Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation Disabled Enabled OperationStep1 Disabled Enabled Enabled Enable execution of step 1 Characterist1 Definite time I...

Page 292: ...inverse time delay for step 2 HystAbs2 0 0 50 0 VB 0 1 0 5 Absolute hysteresis in of VBase step 2 Table 159 OV2PTOV 59 Group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description tReset1 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 1 ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve type for ...

Page 293: ...r programmable curve for step 2 CrvSat2 0 100 1 0 Tuning param for programmable over voltage TOV curve step 2 Table 160 OV2PTOV 59 Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description ConnType PhN DFT PhPh DFT PhN RMS PhPh RMS PhN DFT Group selector for connection type GlobalBaseSel 1 12 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups 9 2 6 Monitored data Table 161 OV2PTOV...

Page 294: ...e OV2PTOV 59 will trip if the voltage gets higher than the set percentage of the set base voltage VBase This means operation for phase to ground voltage over Vpickup VBase kV 3 EQUATION1610 V2 EN Equation 54 and operation for phase to phase voltage over Vpickup VBase kV EQUATION1992 V1 EN Equation 55 When phase to ground voltage measurement is selected the function automatically introduces divisio...

Page 295: ...pickup Set value for step 1 and step 2 V Measured voltage The type B curve is described as t TD V Vpickup Vpickup 480 32 0 5 0 035 ANSIEQUATION2287 V3 EN Equation 57 The type C curve is described as t TD V Vpickup Vpickup 480 32 0 5 0 035 ANSIEQUATION2288 V2 EN Equation 58 The customer programmable curve is defined by the below equation where A B C D k and p are settings P TD A t D V Vpickup B C V...

Page 296: ...equires that the overvoltage condition continues for at least the user set time delay This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode DT and by selected voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode TOV If the PICKUP condition with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay time and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time tReset...

Page 297: ...y decreased during the reset time ANSI05000019 3 en vsd Voltage Time HystAbs1 PICKUP TRIP PU_Overvolt1 PICKUP TRIP t tIReset1 Time Time Integrator t Frozen Timer Linearly decreased Instantaneous Measured Voltage tIReset1 ANSI05000019 V3 EN Figure 95 Voltage profile not causing a reset of the PICKUP signal for step 1 and inverse time delay at different reset types 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 9 Volta...

Page 298: ...delay at different reset types Definite time delay When definite time delay is selected the function will trip as shown in figure 97 Detailed information about individual stage reset operation behavior is shown in figure 89 and figure 90 respectively Note that by setting tResetn 0 0s where n means either 1 or 2 respectively instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured Section ...

Page 299: ...re 97 Detailed logic diagram for step 1 definite time delay DT operation Pickup1 PICKUP TRIP tReset1 t1 ANSI10000037 2 en vsd ANSI10000037 V2 EN Figure 98 Example for step 1 Definite Time Delay stage 1 reset 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 9 Voltage protection Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 293 Technical manual ...

Page 300: ...p 2 9 2 7 4 Design The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase to ground voltages or the three phase to phase voltages Recursive Fourier filters or true RMS filters of input voltage signals are used The phase voltages are individually compared to the set value and the highest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration A special logic is included to achi...

Page 301: ... Time integrator tIReset2 ResetTypeCrv2 Voltage Phase Selector OpMode2 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 Time integrator tIReset1 ResetTypeCrv1 Voltage Phase Selector OpMode1 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 VA VB VC TRIP TRIP OR OR OR OR OR OR PICKUP TRST2 B Pickup 1 Pickup 1 Pickup 2 Pickup 2 Pickup 2 Phase B Phase C t1 t1Reset t2 t2Reset ANSI05000013 2 en vsd ANSI05000013 V2 EN Figure 100 Schema...

Page 302: ...ter Definite time delay high step step 2 at 0 to 1 2 x Vset 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 45 ms whichever is greater Minimum trip time Inverse characteristics 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 45 ms whichever is greater Trip time pickup at 0 to 2 x Vset Min 15 ms Max 30 ms Reset time pickup at 2 to 0 x Vset Min 15 ms Max 30 ms Trip time pickup at 0 to 1 2 x Vset Min 20 ms Max 35 ms Reset time pickup at 1 2 to 0 x Vse...

Page 303: ...rbine startup and so on Separate definite time delays are provided for trip and restore SAPTUF 81 is provided with undervoltage blocking The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two phase phase or three phase neutral voltages to be connected For information about how to connect analog inputs refer to Application manual IED application Analog inputs Setting guide...

Page 304: ...ency 35 00 75 00 Hz 0 01 48 80 Frequency set value tDelay 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 200 Operate time delay tReset 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Time delay for reset tRestore 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Restore time delay RestoreFreq 45 00 65 00 Hz 0 01 50 10 Restore frequency value TimerMode Definite timer Volt based timer Definite timer Setting for choosing timer mode VNom 50 0 150 0 VB 1 0 100 0 Nomina...

Page 305: ...requency measurement at low voltage magnitude a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available from the preprocessing function that is if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage in the preprocessing function the function is blocked and no PICKUP or TRIP signal is issued 10 1 7 1 Measurement principle The fundamental frequency of the measured input voltage is measured continuou...

Page 306: ...g the hysteresis area the PICKUP condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area On the RESTORE output of SAPTUF 81 a 100ms pulse is issued after a time delay corresponding to the setting of tRestore when the measured frequency returns to the level corresponding to the setting RestoreFreq 10 1 7 3 Voltage dependent time delay Sin...

Page 307: ...characteristics are shown in figure 102 for VMin 90 100 t_MaxTrip Delay 1 0 s t_MinTripD elay 0 0 s Exponent 0 1 2 3 and 4 90 95 100 0 0 5 1 en05000075_ansi vsd TimeDlyOperate s V of VBase Exponenent 0 1 2 3 4 ANSI05000075 V1 EN Figure 102 Voltage dependent inverse time characteristics for underfrequency protection SAPTUF 81 The time delay to trip is plotted as a function of the measured voltage f...

Page 308: ... element continuously measures the frequency of the positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting PUFrequency The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults The time integrator can trip either due to a definite delay time or to the special voltage dependent delay time When the frequency has returned back to the setting of RestoreFreq the RESTORE output...

Page 309: ...p Output Logic en05000726_ansi vsd TRIP BLKDMAGN ANSI05000726 V1 EN Figure 103 Simplified logic diagram for SAPTUF 81 10 2 Overfrequency protection SAPTOF 81 10 2 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Overfrequency protection SAPTOF f SYMBOL O V1 EN 81 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 10 Frequency protection Phasor measureme...

Page 310: ...provided with an undervoltage blocking The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two phase phase or three phase neutral voltages to be connected For information about how to connect analog inputs refer to Application manual IED application Analog inputs Setting guidelines 10 2 3 Function block ANSI06000280 2 en vsd SAPTOF 81 V3P BLOCK BLKTRIP TRIP PICKUP BLKDMAGN...

Page 311: ... 10 2 6 Monitored data Table 172 SAPTOF 81H Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description VLevel REAL kV Level of measured voltage FREQ REAL Hz Measured frequency 10 2 7 Operation principle Overfrequency protection SAPTOF 81 is used to detect high power system frequency SAPTOF 81 has a settable definite time delay If the frequency remains above the set value for a time period correspondin...

Page 312: ...cy condition continues for at least the user set time delay tReset If the PICKUP condition with respect to the measured frequency ceases during this user set delay time and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time tReset the PICKUP output is reset after that the defined reset time has elapsed It is to be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area the PICKUP condition must be fulfi...

Page 313: ...integrator Definite Time Delay TimeDlyOperate TimeDlyReset Comparator V IntBlockLevel BLOCK en05000735_ansi vsd Frequency Comparator f PuFrequency TRIP BLKDMAGN BLOCK OR BLKTRIP ANSI05000735 V1 EN Figure 105 Simplified logic diagram for SAPTOF 81 10 2 8 Technical data Table 173 SAPTOF 81 technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Trip value pickup function at symmetrical three phase voltage 3...

Page 314: ...te of change frequency protection function SAPFRC 81 gives an early indication of a main disturbance in the system SAPFRC 81 measures frequency with high accuracy and can be used for generation shedding load shedding and remedial action schemes SAPFRC 81 can discriminate between a positive or negative change of frequency A definite time delay is provided for trip SAPFRC 81 is provided with an unde...

Page 315: ...equency gradient RESTORE BOOLEAN Restore signal for load restoring purposes BLKDMAGN BOOLEAN Blocking indication due to low magnitude 10 3 5 Settings Table 176 SAPFRC 81R Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation Disabled Enabled PUFreqGrad 10 00 10 00 Hz s 0 01 0 50 Frequency gradient pick up value the sign defines direction...

Page 316: ...estore signal is issued 10 3 7 1 Measurement principle The rate of change of the fundamental frequency of the selected voltage is measured continuously and compared with the set value PUFreqGrad Rate of change frequency protection SAPFRC 81 is also dependent on the voltage magnitude If the voltage magnitude decreases below the setting MinValFreqMeas in the preprocessing function which is set as a ...

Page 317: ...fined by the settings RestoreFreq and tRestore 10 3 7 3 Blocking Rate of change frequency protection SAPFRC 81 can be partially or totally blocked by binary input signals or by parameter settings where BLOCK blocks all outputs BLKTRIP blocks the TRIP output BLKREST blocks the RESTORE output If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of MinValFreqMeas in the preprocessing function bo...

Page 318: ... V1 EN Figure 107 Simplified logic diagram for SAPFRC 81 10 3 8 Technical data Table 178 SAPFRC 81 Technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Trip value pickup function 10 00 10 00 Hz s 10 0 mHz s Trip value restore enable frequency 45 00 65 00 Hz 2 0 mHz Definite restore time delay 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 100 ms whichever is greater Definite time delay for frequency gradient trip 0 200 60 000 ...

Page 319: ...nd Once the timers reach their limit an alarm or trip signal is activated to protect the turbine against the abnormal frequency operation This function is blocked during generator start up or shut down conditions by monitoring the circuit breaker position and current threshold value The function is also blocked when the system positive sequence voltage magnitude deviates from the given voltage ban...

Page 320: ...QFVR 81A Output signals Name Type Description ERROR BOOLEAN Error output for incorrect settings TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal of the function TRIPACC BOOLEAN Trip signal when accumulation time is exceeded the set limit TRIPCONT BOOLEAN Trip signal when continuous time is exceeded the set limit BFI_3P BOOLEAN Pickup signal of the function ACCALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal for reaching the frequency time acc...

Page 321: ...isable Enable Enable Enabling the voltage band limit check VHighLimit 0 0 200 0 VB 1 0 200 0 Voltage high limit for voltage band limit check VLowLimit 0 0 200 0 VB 1 0 0 0 Voltage low limit for voltage band limit check Table 182 FTAQFVR 81A Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description GlobalBaseSel 1 12 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups initTimeAcc 0 ...

Page 322: ...auxiliary supply transformers or not FTAQFVR 81A function will be blocked when the measured current magnitude drops below the setting PickupCurrentLevel and CBOPEN input is high FTAQFVR 81A remains blocked until the generator returns to the operation condition It can be verified by using the CBCLOSE signal Generator s start and stop detection logics for the BFI_3P output can be ignored by disablin...

Page 323: ... can be set to the initTimeAcc parameter value by activating the LOADINT input with the LHMI and it can be reset to zero by activating the RESETACC input The RESETACC input can be activated by a binary input The accumulated time ACCTIME is provided as a service output The last completed individual event time is updated in the LASTEVTD output This output holds the last completed individual event ti...

Page 324: ...a proper operation the set frequency high limit should be more than the set frequency low limit To avoid malfunction a check is performed that FreqHighLimit is greater than FreqLowLimit If not the ERROR signal is activated FTAQFVR 81A can be instantiated with one or more frequency ranges according to the turbine manufacturer s specification When the frequency falls in to the common zone when two f...

Page 325: ...t check 0 0 200 0 of VBase 0 5 of Vn at V Vn 0 5 of V at V Vn Trip value current pickup level 5 0 100 0 of IBase 1 0 of Ir or 0 01 A at I In Independent time delay for the continuous time limit at fset 0 02 Hz to fset 0 02 Hz 0 0 6000 0 s 0 2 or 200 ms whichever is greater Independent time delay for the accumulation time limit at fset 0 02 Hz to fset 0 02 Hz 10 0 90000 0 s 0 2 or 200 ms whichever ...

Page 326: ...320 ...

Page 327: ...VGAPC I3P V3P BLOCK BLKOC1 BLKOC1TR ENMLTOC1 BLKOC2 BLKOC2TR ENMLTOC2 BLKUC1 BLKUC1TR BLKUC2 BLKUC2TR BLKOV1 BLKOV1TR BLKOV2 BLKOV2TR BLKUV1 BLKUV1TR BLKUV2 BLKUV2TR TRIP TROC1 TROC2 TRUC1 TRUC2 TROV1 TROV2 TRUV1 TRUV2 PICKUP PU_OC1 PU_OC2 PU_UC1 PU_UC2 PU_OV1 PU_OV2 PU_UV1 PU_UV2 BLK2ND DIROC1 DIROC2 VDIRLOW CURRENT ICOSFI VOLTAGE VIANGLE ANSI05000372 V2 EN Figure 110 CVGAPC function block 1MRK 5...

Page 328: ...1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over voltage function OV1 BLKOV1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over voltage function OV1 BLKOV2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over voltage function OV2 BLKOV2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over voltage function OV2 BLKUV1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under voltage function UV1 BLKUV1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under voltage function UV1 BLKUV2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under voltage function UV2 BLKUV...

Page 329: ...LEAN Pickup signal from overvoltage function OV2 PU_UV1 BOOLEAN Pickup signal from undervoltage function UV1 PU_UV2 BOOLEAN Pickup signal from undervoltage function UV2 BLK2ND BOOLEAN Second harmonic block signal DIROC1 INTEGER Directional mode of OC1 nondir forward reverse DIROC2 INTEGER Directional mode of OC2 nondir forward reverse VDIRLOW BOOLEAN Low voltage for directional polarization CURREN...

Page 330: ...function OperHarmRestr Disabled Enabled Disabled Disable Enable operation of 2nd harmonic restrain l_2nd l_fund 10 0 50 0 1 0 20 0 Ratio of second to fundamental current harmonic in BlkLevel2nd 10 5000 IB 1 5000 Harm analyse disabled above this current level in of fundamental current EnRestrainCurr Disabled Enabled Disabled Disable Enable current restrain function RestrCurrInput PosSeq NegSeq 3 Ze...

Page 331: ...0 01 0 05 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for OC1 VCntrlMode_OC1 Voltage control Disabled Disabled Control mode for voltage controlled OC1 function VDepMode_OC1 Step Slope Step Voltage dependent mode OC1 step slope VDepFact_OC1 0 02 5 00 0 01 1 00 Multiplying factor for current pickup when OC1 is voltage dependent VLowLimit_OC1 1 0 200 0 VB 0 1 50 0 Voltage low limit setting OC1 in of UBa...

Page 332: ... control Disabled Disabled Control mode for voltage controlled OC2 function VDepMode_OC2 Step Slope Step Voltage dependent mode OC2 step slope VDepFact_OC2 0 02 5 00 0 01 1 00 Multiplying factor for current pickup when OC2 is voltage dependent VLowLimit_OC2 1 0 200 0 VB 0 1 50 0 Voltage low limit setting OC2 in of UBase VHighLimit_OC2 1 0 200 0 VB 0 1 100 0 Voltage high limit setting OC2 in of UBa...

Page 333: ...abled Enabled Disabled Enable block of UC2 by 2nd harmonic restrain Operation_OV1 Disabled Enabled Disabled Disable Enable operation of OV1 PickupVolt_OV1 2 0 200 0 VB 0 1 150 0 Operate voltage level for OV1 in of VBase CurveType_OV1 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog inv curve Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for OV1 tDef_OV1 0 00 6000 00 s 0 01 1 0...

Page 334: ...ed Enabled Enable internal low voltage level blocking for UV1 BlkLowVolt_UV1 0 0 5 0 VB 0 1 0 5 Internal low voltage blocking level for UV1 in of VBase Operation_UV2 Disabled Enabled Disabled Disable Enable operation of UV2 PickupVolt_UV2 2 0 150 0 VB 0 1 50 0 Operate undervoltage level for UV2 in of VBase CurveType_UV2 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog inv curve Definite time Sel...

Page 335: ... programmable curve for OC1 MultPU_OC2 1 0 10 0 0 1 2 0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for OC2 ResCrvType_OC2 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OC2 tResetDef_OC2 0 00 6000 00 s 0 01 0 00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve OC2 P_OC2 0 001 10 000 0 001 0 020 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OC2 A_OC2 0 00...

Page 336: ...efinite time use of OV2 tResetIDMT_OV2 0 00 6000 00 s 0 01 0 00 Reset time delay in sec for Inverse Time curves for OV2 A_OV2 0 005 999 000 0 001 0 140 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for OV2 B_OV2 0 500 99 000 0 001 1 000 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for OV2 C_OV2 0 000 1 000 0 001 1 000 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for OV2 D_OV2 0 000 10 000 0 001 0 000 ...

Page 337: ...for customer programmable curve for UV2 C_UV2 0 000 1 000 0 001 1 000 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for UV2 D_UV2 0 000 10 000 0 001 0 000 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for UV2 P_UV2 0 001 10 000 0 001 0 020 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for UV2 Table 189 CVGAPC Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description GlobalBaseSel 1 12 1 1...

Page 338: ...osSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence current phasor 5 NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative sequence current phasor 6 3ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence current phasor multiplied by factor 3 7 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude 8 MinPh CVGAPC ...

Page 339: ...tion will measure the phase C voltage phasor 4 PosSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence voltage phasor 5 NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative sequence voltage phasor This voltage phasor will be intentionally rotated for 180 in order to enable easier settings for the directional feature when used 6 3ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measur...

Page 340: ...hase VT inputs can be connected to IED as either three phase to ground voltages VA VB VC or three phase to phase voltages VAB VBC VCA This information about actual VT connection is entered as a setting parameter for the pre processing block which will then take automatic care about it The user can select one of the current quantities shown in table 193 for built in current restraint feature Table ...

Page 341: ...he measured current quantity is bigger than this set level However depending on other enabled built in features this overcurrent pickup might not cause the overcurrent step pickup signal Pickup signal will only come if all of the enabled built in features in the overcurrent step are fulfilled at the same time Second harmonic feature The overcurrent protection step can be restrained by a second har...

Page 342: ... from 45 to 90 depending on the power system voltage level X R ratio NegSeq NegSeq Directional negative sequence overcurrent function is obtained Typical setting for RCADir is from 45 to 90 depending on the power system voltage level X R ratio 3ZeroSeq 3ZeroSeq Directional zero sequence overcurrent function is obtained Typical setting for RCADir is from 0 to 90 depending on the power system ground...

Page 343: ... the parameter setting tool checks that that the product I cos Φ is bigger than the set pick up level where Φ is angle between the current phasor and the mta line that the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region defined by the I cos Φ straight line and the relay trip angle ROADir parameter setting see figure 111 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 11 Multipurpose protection Phasor mea...

Page 344: ...t It shall also be noted that the memory duration is limited in the algorithm to 100 ms After that time the current direction will be locked to the one determined during memory time and it will re set only if the current fails below set pickup level or voltage goes above set voltage memory limit Voltage restraint control feature The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent of a ...

Page 345: ...PickupCurr_OC1 VHighLimit_OC1 en05000323_ansi vsd ANSI05000323 V1 EN Figure 114 Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of measured voltage magnitude in Step mode of operation This feature will simply change the set overcurrent pickup level in accordance with magnitude variations of the measured voltage It shall be noted that this feature will as well affect the pickup curr...

Page 346: ...urrent magnitude When set the pickup signal will start definite time delay or inverse IDMT time delay in accordance with the end user setting If the pickup signal has value one for longer time than the set time delay the overcurrent step will set its trip signal to one Reset of the pickup and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end user setting 11 1 6 4 Built in u...

Page 347: ... can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end user setting 11 1 6 6 Built in undervoltage protection steps Two undervoltage protection steps are available They are absolutely identical and therefore only one will be explained here Undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity see table 192 with the set pickup level The undervoltage step will pick...

Page 348: ... 116 shows how internal treatment of measured currents is done for multipurpose protection function The following currents and voltages are inputs to the multipurpose protection function They must all be expressed in true power system primary Amperes and kilovolts 1 Instantaneous values samples of currents voltages from one three phase current and one three phase voltage input 2 Fundamental freque...

Page 349: ...e voltage from the three phase input system see table 192 for internally measured voltage 3 Selects one current from the three phase input system see table 193 for internally measured restraint current 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 11 Multipurpose protection Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 343 Technical manual ...

Page 350: ...d Selected voltage VDIRLOW TROC1 OC1 2nd Harmonic restraint Current restraint Directionality Voltage control restraint OC2 2nd Harmonic restraint Current restraint Directionality Voltage control restraint DIROC2 DIROC1 2nd Harmonic restraint 2nd Harmonic restraint VOLTAGE OR OR Section 11 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Multipurpose protection 344 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 351: ...steps internal OR logic are available from multipurpose function as well Second harmonic check Selected voltage X PickupCurr_OC1 a b a b Voltage control or restraint feature OC1 On BLKOC1 Directionality check Current Restraint Feature Imeasured k Irestraint DIR_OK Inverse 0 DEF DEF time selected Inverse time selected OR Enable second harmonic en05000831_ansi vsd Selected current PU_OC1 TROC1 AND B...

Page 352: ... UC2 has the same internal logic a b a b Selected voltage PickupVolt_OV1 Operation_OV1 On BLKOV1 Inverse time selected en05000751_ansi vsd Inverse 0 DEF DEF time selected PU_OV1 TROV1 AND BLKTROV1 AND OR 0 ANSI05000751 V1 EN Figure 120 Simplified internal logic diagram for built in first overvoltage step OV1 step OV2 has the same internal logic Section 11 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Multipurpose protection...

Page 353: ...Ph MinPh Ph UnbalancePh Ph Measuring voltage input Phase A Phase B Phase C PosSeq NegSeq 3 ZeroSeq MaxPh MinPh UnbalancePh Phase A Phase B Phase B Phase C Phase C Phase A MaxPh Ph MinPh Ph UnbalancePh Ph Pickup overcurrent step 1 2 2 5000 of IBase 1 0 of In at I In 1 0 of I at I In Pickup undercurrent step 1 2 2 150 of IBase 1 0 of In at I In 1 0 of I at I In Independent time delay overcurrent at ...

Page 354: ...r 0 0 5 0 of VBase 0 5 of Vn Pickup overvoltage step 1 2 2 0 200 0 of VBase 0 5 of Vn at V Vn 0 5 of V at V Vn Pickup undervoltage step 1 2 2 0 150 0 of VBase 0 5 of Vn at V Vn 0 5 of V at V Vn Independent time delay overvoltage at 0 8 to 1 2 x Vset step 1 2 0 00 6000 00 s 0 2 or 35 ms whichever is greater Independent time delay undervoltage at 1 2 to 0 8 x Vset step 1 2 0 00 6000 00 s 0 2 or 35 m...

Page 355: ...0 degrees Reset ratio overcurrent 95 Reset ratio undercurrent 105 Reset ratio overvoltage 95 Reset ratio undervoltage 105 Overcurrent Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset Impulse margin time 15 ms typically Undercurrent Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset Impulse margin time 15 ms typically Overvoltage Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 8 to 1 2 x Vset ...

Page 356: ...350 ...

Page 357: ...ocessing function block SMAI However the main difference is that it can be used to extract any frequency component from the input signal Thus it can for example be used to build sub synchronous resonance protection for synchronous generator 12 1 3 Function block SMAIHPAC BLOCK G3P AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 IEC13000180 1 en vsd IEC13000180 V1 EN 12 1 4 Signals Table 196 SMAIHPAC Input signals Name Type ...

Page 358: ...iltering window overlap between two calculations in percent 12 1 6 Operation principle For all four analogue input signals into this filter i e three phases and the residual quantity the input samples from the TRM module which are coming at rate of 20 samples per fundamental system cycle are first stored When enough samples are available in the internal memory the phasor values at set frequency de...

Page 359: ...equence phasor Negative sequence phasor Zero sequence phasor etc In order to properly calculate phase to phase phasors from the individual phase phasors or vice versa the setting parameters ConnectionType is provided It defines what quantities i e individual phases or phase to phase quantities are physically connected to the IED analogue inputs by wiring Then the IED knows which one of them are th...

Page 360: ...tion by the filter Note that the used number of samples is always a power of number two Table 199 Length of the filtering window Value for parameter FilterLength Used No of samples for calculation fixed independent from rated frequency Corresponding length of the input waveform in miliseconds for 50Hz power system Corresponding length of the input waveform in miliseconds for 60Hz power system 0 1 ...

Page 361: ...cy component and any other noise present in the input signal waveform For example if 46 Hz signal wants to be extracted in 50Hz power system then from Table 200 it can be concluded that FilterLength 1 0 s shall be selected as a minimum value However if frequency deviation of the fundamental frequency signal in the power system are taken into account it may be advisable to select FilterLength 2 0 s...

Page 362: ...r the extracted phasor when OverLap 0 the new phasor value is calculated only once per FilterLength when OverLap 50 the new phasor value is calculated two times per FilterLength when OverLap 75 the new phasor value is calculated four times per FilterLength when OverLap 90 the new phasor value is calculated ten times per FilterLength 12 1 7 Filter calculation example In the following Figure an exam...

Page 363: ... in Hz Note the very narrow scale on the y axle for b and c Such small scale as well indicates with which precision and consistency the filter calculates the phasor magnitude and frequency of the extracted stator sub synchronous current component The following can be observed in the Figure The stator total RMS current value is around 33 kA primary The measured magnitude of the sub synchronous curr...

Page 364: ...rrent magnitude and frequency are calculated approximately four times per second that is correct value is four times per 1024 ms Section 12 1MRK 511 365 UUS A System protection and control 358 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 365: ...rvision CCSSPVC 87 compares the residual current from a three phase set of current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate input taken from another set of cores on the current transformer A detection of a difference indicates a fault in the circuit and is used as alarm or to block protection functions expected to give inadvertent tripping 13 1 3 Function block CCSSPVC 87 I3P...

Page 366: ...alues Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation Disabled Enabled IMinOp 10 200 IB 1 20 Minimum operate current differential pickup in of IBase Table 204 CCSSPVC 87 Group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Pickup_Block 20 500 IB 1 150 Block of the function at high phase current in of IBase Table 205 CCSSPVC 87 Non group settings...

Page 367: ...g Operation Enabled The FAIL output remains activated 100 ms after the AND gate resets when being activated for more than 20 ms If the FAIL lasts for more than 150 ms an ALARM will be issued In this case the FAIL and ALARM will remain activated 1 s after the AND gate resets This prevents unwanted resetting of the blocking function when phase current supervision element s trip for example during a ...

Page 368: ...3 1 7 Technical data Table 206 CCSSPVC 87 technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Trip current 10 200 of IBase 10 0 of In at I In 10 0 of I at I In Reset ratio Trip current 90 Block current 20 500 of IBase 5 0 of In at I In 5 0 of I at I In Reset ratio Block current 90 at 50 500 of IBase 13 2 Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC Section 13 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Secondary system supervision 362 Ph...

Page 369: ...on the negative sequence quantities The zero sequence detection is recommended for IEDs used in directly or low impedance grounded networks It is based on the zero sequence measuring quantities The selection of different operation modes is possible by a setting parameter in order to take into account the particular grounding of the network A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measu...

Page 370: ...ral pickup 3PH BOOLEAN Three phase pickup DLD1PH BOOLEAN Dead line condition in at least one phase DLD3PH BOOLEAN Dead line condition in all three phases PU_DI BOOLEAN Common pickup signal of sudden change in current PU_DI_A BOOLEAN Pickupof sudden change in current phase A PU_DI_B BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in current phase B PU_DI_C BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in current pha...

Page 371: ...ble DVPU 1 100 VB 1 60 Pickup of change in phase voltage in of VBase DIPU 1 100 IB 1 15 Pickup of change in phase current in of IBase VPPU 1 100 VB 1 70 Pickup of phase voltage in of VBase IPPU 1 100 IB 1 10 Pickup of phase current in of IBase SealIn Disabled Enabled Enabled Seal in functionality Disable Enable VSealInPU 1 100 VB 1 70 Pickup of seal in phase voltage in of VBase IDLDPU 1 100 IB 1 5...

Page 372: ...voltage 3V2 The measured signals are compared with their respective set values 3V0PU and 3I0PU 3V2PU and 3I2PU The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetZeroSeq if the measured zero sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3V0PU and the measured zero sequence current is below the set value 3I0PU The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetNegSeq if the measured negative sequen...

Page 373: ...t BLKTRIP is activated and the internal signal FuseFailStarted is not present The operation mode selector OpModeSel is set to Disable The IED is in TEST status TEST ACTIVE is high and the function has been blocked from the HMI BlockFUSE Yes The input BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse failure supervision function It can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order ...

Page 374: ...tions when the line disconnector is open The impedance protection function is not affected by the position of the line disconnector since there will be no line currents that can cause malfunction of the distance protection If 89b 0 it signifies that the line is connected to the system and when the 89b 1 it signifies that the line is disconnected from the system and the block signal BLKV is generat...

Page 375: ... If the DVDI detection of three phases set the internal signal FuseFailDetDVDI at the level high then the signal FuseFailDetDVDI will remain high as long as the voltage of three phases are lower then the setting VPPU In addition to fuse failure detection two internal signals DeltaV and DeltaI are also generated by the delta current and delta voltage DVDI detection algorithm The internal signals De...

Page 376: ... b a b VC IC a b a b AND AND OR OR AND AND FuseFailDetDVDI DVDI Detection DeltaIA DeltaVA DeltaIB DeltaVB DeltaIC DeltaVC ANSI12000166 3 en vsd DVPU DIPU DI detection based on sample analysis DV detection based on sample analysis t 20 ms IC IB IC IB IC IB ANSI12000166 V3 EN Figure 128 Simplified logic diagram for the DV DI detection part Section 13 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Secondary system supervision 3...

Page 377: ...ad line detection A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 130 A dead phase condition is indicated if both the voltage and the current in one phase is below their respective setting values VDLDPU and IDLDPU If at least one phase is considered to be dead the output DLD1PH and the internal signal DeadLineDet1Ph is activated If all three phases are considered to be dead the outpu...

Page 378: ...r OpModeSel has been introduced to make it possible to select different operating modes for the negative and zero sequence based algorithms The different operation modes are Disabled The negative and zero sequence function is disabled V2I2 Negative sequence is selected V0I0 Zero sequence is selected V0I0 OR V2I2 Both negative and zero sequence are activated and work in parallel in an OR condition ...

Page 379: ...lue in its non volatile memory and re establishes the conditions that were present before the shut down All phase voltages must be greater than VSealInPU before fuse failure is de activated and resets the signals BLKU BLKZ and 3PH The output signal BLKV will also be active if all phase voltages have been above the setting VSealInPU for more than 60 seconds the zero or negative sequence voltage has...

Page 380: ...ZsNs AND FuseFailDetNegSeq OR AND AND CurrZeroSeq CurrNegSeq a b a b OR AND AND AND FuseFailDetDUDI AND OpDVDI Enabled DeadLineDet1Ph OR OR OR OR AND VoltZeroSeq VoltNegSeq OR t 5 s AllCurrLow t 150 ms intBlock Fuse failure detection Main logic BLKTRIP AND t 100 ms OR t 20 ms OR ANSI10000033 3 en vsd FusefailStarted ANSI10000033 V3 EN Section 13 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Secondary system supervision 374 ...

Page 381: ... 1 100 of IBase 0 5 of In Trip voltage change pickup 1 100 of VBase 10 0 of Vn Trip current change pickup 1 100 of IBase 10 0 of In Trip phase voltage 1 100 of VBase 0 5 of Vn Trip phase current 1 100 of IBase 0 5 of In Trip phase dead line voltage 1 100 of VBase 0 5 of Vn Trip phase dead line current 1 100 of IBase 0 5 of In Pickup time 1 ph pickup at 1 to 0 x Vn Min 10 ms Max 25 ms Reset time 1 ...

Page 382: ...376 ...

Page 383: ...resentation SLGAPC or the selector switch function block is used to get an enhanced selector switch functionality compared to the one provided by a hardware selector switch Hardware selector switches are used extensively by utilities in order to have different functions operating on pre set values Hardware switches are however sources for maintenance issues lower system reliability and an extended...

Page 384: ...EC14000005 1 en vsd IEC14000005 V1 EN Figure 132 SLGAPC function block 14 1 4 Signals Table 213 SLGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection UP BOOLEAN 0 Binary UP command DOWN BOOLEAN 0 Binary DOWN command Section 14 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Control 378 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 385: ...ch position 15 P16 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 16 P17 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 17 P18 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 18 P19 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 19 P20 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 20 P21 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 21 P22 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 22 P23 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 23 P24 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 24 P25 BOOLEAN Selector swit...

Page 386: ...ll be activated When a signal is received on the DOWN input the function will activate the output next to the present activated output in descending order for example if the present activated output is P03 and one activates the DOWN input then the output P02 will be activated Depending on the output settings the output signals can be steady or pulsed In case of steady signals the output will be ac...

Page 387: ...sibilities for SLGAPC if it is used just for the monitoring the switches will be listed with their actual position names as defined by the user max 13 characters if it is used for control the switches will be listed with their actual positions but only the first three letters of the name will be used In both cases the switch full name will be shown but the user has to redefine it when building the...

Page 388: ...ettings Diagnostics Test Reset Authorization Language Select switch Press the Open or Close key A dialog box appears E The pos will not be modified outputs will not be activated until you press the E button for O K Open Close ANSI06000421 V2 EN Figure 133 Example 2 on handling the switch from the local HMI From the single line diagram on local HMI 14 2 Selector mini switch VSGAPC 14 2 1 Identifica...

Page 389: ...nals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection IPOS1 BOOLEAN 0 Position 1 indicating input IPOS2 BOOLEAN 0 Position 2 indicating input Table 218 VSGAPC Output signals Name Type Description BLOCKED BOOLEAN The function is active but the functionality is blocked POSITION INTEGER Position indication integer POS1 BOOLEAN Position 1 indicati...

Page 390: ... CMDPOS12 is set when the function receives a CLOSE command from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen The output CMDPOS21 is set when the function receives an OPEN command from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen It is important for indication in the SLD that the a symbol is associated with a controllable object otherwise the symbol won t be...

Page 391: ...ommunication function for Double Point indication DPGAPC 14 3 2 Functionality Generic communication function for Double Point indication DPGAPC function block is used to send double indications to other systems equipment or functions in the substation through IEC 61850 8 1 or other communication protocols It is especially used in the interlocking station wide logics 14 3 3 Function block IEC130000...

Page 392: ...s To be able to get the signals into other systems equipment or functions one must use other tools described in the Engineering manual and define which function block in which systems equipment or functions should receive this information 14 4 Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC 14 4 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2...

Page 393: ...7000143 3 en vsd ANSI07000143 V1 EN Figure 136 SPC8GAPC function block 14 4 4 Signals Table 222 SPC8GAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the function operation PSTO INTEGER 1 Operator place selection Table 223 SPC8GAPC Output signals Name Type Description OUT1 BOOLEAN Command output 1 OUT2 BOOLEAN Command output 2 OUT3 BOOLEAN Command output 3 OUT4 BOOLEAN Comman...

Page 394: ...5 0 01 6000 00 s 0 01 0 10 Pulse time output 5 PulseMode6 Pulsed Latched Pulsed Setting for pulsed latched mode for output 6 tPulse6 0 01 6000 00 s 0 01 0 10 Pulse time output 6 PulseMode7 Pulsed Latched Pulsed Setting for pulsed latched mode for output 7 tPulse7 0 01 6000 00 s 0 01 0 10 Pulse time output 7 PulseMode8 Pulsed Latched Pulsed Setting for pulsed latched mode for output 8 tPulse8 0 01 ...

Page 395: ...IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number AutomationBits command function for DNP3 AUTOBITS 14 5 2 Functionality AutomationBits function for DNP3 AUTOBITS is used within PCM600 to get into the configuration of the commands coming through the DNP3 protocol The AUTOBITS function plays the same role as functions GOOSEBINRCV for IEC 61850 and MULTICMDRCV for LON 1...

Page 396: ...0925 V1 EN Figure 137 AUTOBITS function block 14 5 4 Signals Table 225 AUTOBITS Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection Table 226 AUTOBITS Output signals Name Type Description CMDBIT1 BOOLEAN Command out bit 1 CMDBIT2 BOOLEAN Command out bit 2 CMDBIT3 BOOLEAN Command out bit 3 CMDBIT4 BOOLEAN Command out bit 4 CMDBIT5 BO...

Page 397: ...BOOLEAN Command out bit 20 CMDBIT21 BOOLEAN Command out bit 21 CMDBIT22 BOOLEAN Command out bit 22 CMDBIT23 BOOLEAN Command out bit 23 CMDBIT24 BOOLEAN Command out bit 24 CMDBIT25 BOOLEAN Command out bit 25 CMDBIT26 BOOLEAN Command out bit 26 CMDBIT27 BOOLEAN Command out bit 27 CMDBIT28 BOOLEAN Command out bit 28 CMDBIT29 BOOLEAN Command out bit 29 CMDBIT30 BOOLEAN Command out bit 30 CMDBIT31 BOOL...

Page 398: ...t 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 2 000 Data link confirm timeout in s DLinkRetries 0 255 1 3 Data link maximum retries tRxToTxMinDel 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Rx to Tx minimum delay in s ApLayMaxRxSize 20 2048 1 2048 Application layer maximum Rx fragment size ApLayMaxTxSize 20 2048 1 2048 Application layer maximum Tx fragment size StopBits 1 2 1 1 Stop bits Parity No Even Odd Even Parity tRTSWarmUp 0 000 6...

Page 399: ... 1 2048 Application layer maximum Tx fragment size Table 233 CH2TCP Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled TCP IP UDP Only Disabled Operation mode TCPIPLisPort 1 65535 1 20000 TCP IP listen port UDPPortAccData 1 65535 1 20000 UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from master UDPPortInitNUL 1 65535 1 20000 UDP port for initial NULL response UDPPortCli...

Page 400: ...8 1 2048 Application layer maximum Tx fragment size Table 237 CH4TCP Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled TCP IP UDP Only Disabled Operation mode TCPIPLisPort 1 65535 1 20000 TCP IP listen port UDPPortAccData 1 65535 1 20000 UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from master UDPPortInitNUL 1 65535 1 20000 UDP port for initial NULL response UDPPortCl...

Page 401: ...IChWithRelTim e 3 DIChWithRelTim e Object 4 default variation Obj10DefVar 1 BO 2 BOStatus 2 BOStatus Object 10 default variation Obj20DefVar 1 BinCnt32 2 BinCnt16 5 BinCnt32WoutF 6 BinCnt16WoutF 5 BinCnt32WoutF Object 20 default variation Obj22DefVar 1 BinCnt32EvWout T 2 BinCnt16EvWout T 5 BinCnt32EvWith T 6 BinCnt16EvWith T 1 BinCnt32EvWou tT Object 22 default variation Obj30DefVar 1 AI32Int 2 AI...

Page 402: ...RtryDel 0 00 60 00 s 0 01 30 00 Unsolicited response off line retry delay in s UREvCntThold1 1 100 1 5 Unsolicited response class 1 event count report treshold tVREvBufTout1 0 00 60 00 s 0 01 5 00 Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer timeout UREvCntThold2 1 100 1 5 Unsolicited response class 2 event count report treshold tVREvBufTout2 0 00 60 00 s 0 01 5 00 Unsolicited response class 2 event ...

Page 403: ... 1 0 0 0 0 Master IP address MasterIPNetMsk 0 18 IP Address 1 255 255 255 255 Master IP net mask Obj1DefVar 1 BISingleBit 2 BIWithStatus 1 BISingleBit Object 1 default variation Obj2DefVar 1 BIChWithoutTim e 2 BIChWithTime 3 BIChWithRelTim e 3 BIChWithRelTim e Object 2 default variation Obj3DefVar 1 DIWithoutFlag 2 DIWithFlag 1 DIWithoutFlag Object 3 default variation Obj4DefVar 1 DIChWithoutTim e...

Page 404: ...nable tApplConfTout 0 00 300 00 s 0 01 10 00 Application layer confim timeout ApplMultFrgRes No Yes Yes Enable application for multiple fragment response ConfMultFrag No Yes Yes Confirm each multiple fragment UREnable No Yes Yes Unsolicited response enabled UREvClassMask Disabled Class 1 Class 2 Class 1 and 2 Class 3 Class 1 and 3 Class 2 and 3 Class 1 2 and 3 Disabled Unsolicited response event c...

Page 405: ...eqAfTout No Yes No Time synchronization request after timeout Averag3TimeReq No Yes No Use average of 3 time requests PairedPoint No Yes Yes Enable paired point tSelectTimeout 1 0 60 0 s 0 1 30 0 Select timeout tBrokenConTout 0 3600 s 1 0 Broken connection timeout tKeepAliveT 0 3600 s 1 10 Keep Alive timer Table 243 MST2TCP Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description O...

Page 406: ...With T 1 BinCnt32EvWou tT Object 22 default variation Obj30DefVar 1 AI32Int 2 AI16Int 3 AI32IntWithoutF 4 AI16IntWithoutF 5 AI32FltWithF 6 AI64FltWithF 3 AI32IntWithoutF Object 30 default variation Obj32DefVar 1 AI32IntEvWoutF 2 AI16IntEvWoutF 3 AI32IntEvWithFT 4 AI16IntEvWithFT 5 AI32FltEvWithF 6 AI64FltEvWithF 7 AI32FltEvWithFT 8 AI64FltEvWithFT 1 AI32IntEvWoutF Object 32 default variation Table...

Page 407: ...e class 2 event count report treshold tVREvBufTout2 0 00 60 00 s 0 01 5 00 Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer timeout UREvCntThold3 1 100 1 5 Unsolicited response class 3 event count report treshold tVREvBufTout3 0 00 60 00 s 0 01 5 00 Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer timeout DelOldBufFull No Yes No Delete oldest event when buffer is full ExtTimeFormat LocalTime UTC UTC External ti...

Page 408: ...tus 1 BISingleBit Object 1 default variation Obj2DefVar 1 BIChWithoutTim e 2 BIChWithTime 3 BIChWithRelTim e 3 BIChWithRelTim e Object 2 default variation Obj3DefVar 1 DIWithoutFlag 2 DIWithFlag 1 DIWithoutFlag Object 3 default variation Obj4DefVar 1 DIChWithoutTim e 2 DIChWithTime 3 DIChWithRelTim e 3 DIChWithRelTim e Object 4 default variation Obj10DefVar 1 BO 2 BOStatus 2 BOStatus Object 10 def...

Page 409: ...nable tApplConfTout 0 00 300 00 s 0 01 10 00 Application layer confim timeout ApplMultFrgRes No Yes Yes Enable application for multiple fragment response ConfMultFrag No Yes Yes Confirm each multiple fragment UREnable No Yes Yes Unsolicited response enabled UREvClassMask Disabled Class 1 Class 2 Class 1 and 2 Class 3 Class 1 and 3 Class 2 and 3 Class 1 2 and 3 Disabled Unsolicited response event c...

Page 410: ...eqAfTout No Yes No Time synchronization request after timeout Averag3TimeReq No Yes No Use average of 3 time requests PairedPoint No Yes Yes Enable paired point tSelectTimeout 1 0 60 0 s 0 1 30 0 Select timeout tBrokenConTout 0 3600 s 1 0 Broken connection timeout tKeepAliveT 0 3600 s 1 10 Keep Alive timer Table 247 MST4TCP Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description O...

Page 411: ...With T 1 BinCnt32EvWou tT Object 22 default variation Obj30DefVar 1 AI32Int 2 AI16Int 3 AI32IntWithoutF 4 AI16IntWithoutF 5 AI32FltWithF 6 AI64FltWithF 3 AI32IntWithoutF Object 30 default variation Obj32DefVar 1 AI32IntEvWoutF 2 AI16IntEvWoutF 3 AI32IntEvWithFT 4 AI16IntEvWithFT 5 AI32FltEvWithF 6 AI64FltEvWithF 7 AI32FltEvWithFT 8 AI64FltEvWithFT 1 AI32IntEvWoutF Object 32 default variation Table...

Page 412: ...e class 2 event count report treshold tVREvBufTout2 0 00 60 00 s 0 01 5 00 Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer timeout UREvCntThold3 1 100 1 5 Unsolicited response class 3 event count report treshold tVREvBufTout3 0 00 60 00 s 0 01 5 00 Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer timeout DelOldBufFull No Yes No Delete oldest event when buffer is full ExtTimeFormat LocalTime UTC UTC External ti...

Page 413: ...s will be set to 0 The BLOCK acts like an overriding the function still receives data from the DNP3 master Upon deactivation of BLOCK all the 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set by the DNP3 master again momentarily For AUTOBITS the PSTO input determines the operator place The command can be written to the block while in Remote If PSTO is in Local then no change is applied to the outputs 14 6 Single co...

Page 414: ...gle command output 1 OUT2 BOOLEAN Single command output 2 OUT3 BOOLEAN Single command output 3 OUT4 BOOLEAN Single command output 4 OUT5 BOOLEAN Single command output 5 OUT6 BOOLEAN Single command output 6 OUT7 BOOLEAN Single command output 7 OUT8 BOOLEAN Single command output 8 OUT9 BOOLEAN Single command output 9 OUT10 BOOLEAN Single command output 10 OUT11 BOOLEAN Single command output 11 OUT12...

Page 415: ...put signal can be given a name with a maximum of 13 characters in PCM600 The output signals can be of the types Disabled Steady or Pulse This configuration setting is done via the local HMI or PCM600 and is common for the whole function block The length of the output pulses are 100 ms In steady mode SINGLECMD function has a memory to remember the output values at power interruption of the IED Also...

Page 416: ...410 ...

Page 417: ...0266 V1 EN Figure 139 Simplified logic diagram for three pole trip SMPPTRC 94 function for single pole and two pole tripping has additional phase segregated inputs for this as well as inputs for faulted phase selection The latter inputs enable single pole and two pole tripping for those functions which do not have their own phase selection capability and therefore which have just a single trip out...

Page 418: ...on to persistent faults A special input is also provided which disables single pole and two pole tripping forcing all tripping to be three pole In multi breaker arrangements one SMPPTRC 94 function block is used for each breaker This can be the case if single pole tripping and autoreclosing is used The breaker close lockout function can be activated from an external trip signal from another protec...

Page 419: ... AND AND OR OR OR AND OR AND OR AND AND tWaitForPHS TR_B TR_C TRINP_A TRINP_B PS_B TRINP_C PS_C 1PTRGF 1PTRZ ANSI10000056 V3 EN Figure 141 Phase segregated front logic 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 15 Logic Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 413 Technical manual ...

Page 420: ...volvingFault tTripMin tTripMin tEvolvingFault tEvolvingFault ANSI05000519 V3 EN Figure 142 Additional logic for the 1ph 3ph operating mode Section 15 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Logic 414 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 421: ...TripMin tTripMin tEvolvingFault tEvolvingFault tEvolvingFault ANSI05000520 V4 EN Figure 143 Additional logic for the 1ph 2ph 3ph operating mode 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 15 Logic Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 415 Technical manual ...

Page 422: ...15 2 2 Functionality The trip matrix logic TMAGAPC function is used to route trip signals and other logical output signals to different output contacts on the IED The trip matrix logic function has 3 output signals and these outputs can be connected to physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs for settable pulse or steady output Section 15 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Logic 416 P...

Page 423: ...00197 1 en vsd IEC13000197 V1 EN Figure 145 TMAGAPC function block 15 2 4 Signals Table 252 TMAGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of output 1 BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of output 2 BLK3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of output 3 INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1 INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2 INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3 INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary inp...

Page 424: ...BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 20 INPUT21 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 21 INPUT22 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 22 INPUT23 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 23 INPUT24 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 24 INPUT25 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 25 INPUT26 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 26 INPUT27 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 27 INPUT28 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 28 INPUT29 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 29 INPUT30 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 30 INPUT31 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 31 ...

Page 425: ...ical value 1 the first output signal OUTPUT1 will get logical value 1 2 when any one of second 16 inputs signals INPUT17 to INPUT32 has logical value 1 the second output signal OUTPUT2 will get logical value 1 3 when any one of all 32 input signals INPUT1 to INPUT32 has logical value 1 the third output signal OUTPUT3 will get logical value 1 By use of the settings ModeOutput1 ModeOutput2 ModeOutpu...

Page 426: ...signals from TMAGAPC are typically connected to other logic blocks or directly to output contacts in the IED When used for direct tripping of the circuit breaker s the pulse time shall be set to at least 0 150 seconds in order to obtain satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the circuit breaker trip coils 15 2 7 Technical data Table 255 Number of TMAGAPC instances Function Quantity wit...

Page 427: ...LH BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 ALARM IEC13000181 1 en vsd IEC13000181 V1 EN 15 3 4 Signals Table 256 ALMCALH Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1 INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2 INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3 INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Bin...

Page 428: ...Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation Disabled Enabled 15 3 6 Operation principle The logic for group alarm ALMCALH block is provided with 16 input signals and one ALARM output signal The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate in order to provide grouping of connected input signals to the output ALARM signal f...

Page 429: ...c for group warning WRNCALH 15 4 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Logic for group warning WRNCALH 15 4 2 Functionality The group warning logic function WRNCALH is used to route several warning signals to a common indication LED and or contact in the IED 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 15 Logic Phasor measurement unit R...

Page 430: ...y input 2 INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3 INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4 INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 5 INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 6 INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 7 INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 8 INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 9 INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10 INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 11 INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 12 INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 13 INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input...

Page 431: ...ernal logic OR gate in order to provide grouping of connected input signals to the output WARNING signal from the function block When any one of 16 input signals INPUT1 to INPUT16 has logical value 1 the WARNING output signal will get logical value 1 The function has a drop off delay of 200 ms when all inputs are reset to provide a steady signal WARNING 1 ANSI13000192 1 en vsd INPUT1 INPUT16 200 m...

Page 432: ...block IEC13000183 1 en vsd INDCALH BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 IND IEC13000183 V1 EN 15 5 4 Signals Table 264 INDCALH Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1 INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2 INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3 INPUT4 BOOL...

Page 433: ... Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation Disabled Enabled 15 5 6 Operation principle The logic for group indication INDCALH block is provided with 16 input signals and 1 IND output signal The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate in order to provide grouping of connected input signals to the output IND signal f...

Page 434: ...s The list below shows a summary of the function blocks and their features These logic blocks are also available as part of an extension logic package with the same number of instances AND function block Each block has four inputs and two outputs where one is inverted GATE function block is used for whether or not a signal should be able to pass from the input to the output INVERTER function block...

Page 435: ... memory setting controls if after a power interruption the flip flop resets or returns to the state it had before the power interruption The SET input has priority TIMERSET function has pick up and drop out delayed outputs related to the input signal The timer has a settable time delay XOR function block Each block has two outputs where one is inverted 15 6 1 AND function block AND The AND functio...

Page 436: ...c block Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms AND 60 60 160 15 6 2 Controllable gate function block GATE The Controllable gate function block GATE is used for controlling if a signal should be able to pass from the input to the output or not depending on a setting 15 6 2 1 Function block IEC04000410 2 en vsd GATE INPUT OUT IEC04000410 V2 EN Figure 149 GATE function block 15 6 2 2 Signals Table...

Page 437: ...f GATE instances Logic block Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms GATE 10 10 20 15 6 3 Inverter function block INV 15 6 3 1 Function block IEC04000404_2_en vsd INV INPUT OUT IEC04000404 V2 EN Figure 150 INV function block 15 6 3 2 Signals Table 275 INV Input signals Name Type Default Description INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input Table 276 INV Output signals Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output 1MRK 5...

Page 438: ... 1 Function block LLD INPUT OUT IEC15000144 vsd IEC15000144 V1 EN Figure 151 LLD function block 15 6 4 2 Signals Table 278 LLD Input signals Name Type Default Description INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal Table 279 LLD Output signals Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output signal delayed one execution cycle 15 6 4 3 Technical data Table 280 Number of LLD instances Logic block Quantity with cycle time ...

Page 439: ...ls Name Type Default Description INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 to OR gate INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 to OR gate INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 to OR gate INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 to OR gate INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 to OR gate INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 to OR gate Table 282 OR Output signals Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output from OR gate NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output from OR gate 15 6 5 3 Technical data Tab...

Page 440: ...able 284 PULSETIMER Input signals Name Type Default Description INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to pulse timer Table 285 PULSETIMER Output signals Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output from pulse timer 15 6 6 3 Settings Table 286 PULSETIMER Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description t 0 000 90000 000 s 0 001 0 010 Time delay of function 15 6 6 4 Technical data Table 287 Numb...

Page 441: ...r priority over SET input Table 288 Truth table for RSMEMORY function block RESET SET OUT NOUT 0 0 Last value Inverted last value 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 15 6 7 1 Function block RSMEMORY SET RESET OUT NOUT IEC09000294 1 en vsd IEC09000294 V1 EN Figure 154 RSMEMORY function block 15 6 7 2 Signals Table 289 RSMEMORY Input signals Name Type Default Description SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set RESET ...

Page 442: ...hat can set or reset an output from two inputs respectively Each SRMEMORY function block has two outputs where one is inverted The memory setting controls if after a power interruption the flip flop resets or returns to the state it had before the power interruption The input SET has priority Table 293 Truth table for SRMEMORY function block SET RESET OUT NOUT 0 0 Last value Inverted last value 0 ...

Page 443: ...ed Enabled Enabled Operating mode of the memory function 15 6 8 4 Technical data Table 297 Number of SRMEMORY instances Logic block Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms SRMEMORY 10 10 20 15 6 9 Settable timer function block TIMERSET The Settable timer function block TIMERSET timer has two outputs for the delay of the input signal at drop out and at pick up The timer has a settable time delay ...

Page 444: ...EN Figure 157 TIMERSET function block 15 6 9 2 Signals Table 298 TIMERSET Input signals Name Type Default Description INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to timer Table 299 TIMERSET Output signals Name Type Description ON BOOLEAN Output from timer pickup delay OFF BOOLEAN Output from timer dropout delay Section 15 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Logic 438 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 445: ... ms 15 6 10 Exclusive OR function block XOR The exclusive OR function XOR is used to generate combinatory expressions with boolean variables XOR has two inputs and two outputs One of the outputs is inverted The output signal OUT is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are the same Table 302 Truth table for XOR function block INPUT1 INPUT2 OUT NOUT 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 15 6...

Page 446: ...e function blocks assist the user to adapt the IEDs configuration to the specific application needs The list below shows a summary of the function blocks and their features ANDQT AND function block The function also propagates the time stamp and the quality of input signals Each block has four inputs and two outputs where one is inverted INDCOMBSPQT combines single input signals to group signal Si...

Page 447: ...unction block is a flip flop that can reset or set an output from two inputs respectively Each block has two outputs where one is inverted The memory setting controls if the block after a power interruption should return to the state before the interruption or be reset The function also propagates the time stamp and the quality of the input signal SRMEMORYQT function block is a flip flop that can ...

Page 448: ...159 ANDQT function block 15 7 1 2 Signals Table 306 ANDQT Input signals Name Type Default Description INPUT1 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 1 INPUT2 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 2 INPUT3 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 3 INPUT4 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 4 Table 307 ANDQT Output signals Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output signal NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal 15 7 1 3 Technical data Table 308 Number of ANDQT insta...

Page 449: ...he time stamps of the signals via IEC61850 15 7 2 1 Function block INDCOMBSPQT SP_IN TIME BLOCKED SUBST INVALID TEST SP_OUT IEC15000146 vsd IEC15000146 V1 EN Figure 160 INDCOMBSPQT function block 15 7 2 2 Signals Table 309 INDCOMBSPQT Input signals Name Type Default Description SP_IN BOOLEAN 0 Single point indication TIME GROUP SIGNAL 0 Timestamp BLOCKED BOOLEAN 0 Blocked for update SUBST BOOLEAN ...

Page 450: ...bits in the common part and the indication part of the input signal are copied to the corresponding state output INDEXTSPQT can propagate the quality the value and the time stamps of the signals via IEC61850 15 7 3 1 Function block INDEXTSPQT SI_IN SI_OUT TIME BLOCKED SUBST INVALID TEST IEC14000067 1 en vsd IEC14000067 V1 EN Figure 161 INDEXTSPQT function block 15 7 3 2 Signals Table 312 INDEXTSPQ...

Page 451: ...LIDQT Component which sets quality invalid of outputs according to a valid input The values of the input signals INPUTx where 1 x 16 are copied to the outputs OUTPUTx where 1 x 16 If the input VALID is 0 or if its quality bit is set invalid all outputs OUTPUTx where 1 x 16 quality bit will be set to invalid The time stamp of any output OUTPUTx where 1 x 16 will be set to the latest time stamp of a...

Page 452: ... BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 2 INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 3 INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 4 INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 5 INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 6 INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 7 INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 8 INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 9 INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 10 INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 11 INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 12 INPU...

Page 453: ...PUT13 BOOLEAN Indication output 13 OUTPUT14 BOOLEAN Indication output 14 OUTPUT15 BOOLEAN Indication output 15 OUTPUT16 BOOLEAN Indication output 16 15 7 4 3 Technical data Table 317 Number of INVALIDQT instances Logic block Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms INVALIDQT 6 6 15 7 5 Inverter function block INVERTERQT The INVERTERQT function block inverts one binary input signal to the output I...

Page 454: ...ction block The ORQT function block ORQT is used to form general combinatory expressions OR with boolean variables ORQT function block has up to six inputs and two outputs One of the outputs is inverted It can propagate the quality value and the timestamps of the signals via IEC61850 15 7 6 1 Function block ORQT INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 OUT NOUT IEC09000298 1 en vsd IEC09000298 V1...

Page 455: ... pulse timer function block PULSETIMERQT can be used for example for pulse extensions or for limiting the operation time of the outputs PULSETIMERQT has a settable output pulse length When the input goes to 1 the output will be 1 for the time set by the time delay parameter t Then it returns to 0 When the output changes value the time stamp of the output signal is updated The supported quality sta...

Page 456: ...n t 0 000 90000 000 s 0 001 0 010 Pulse time length 15 7 7 4 Technical data Table 327 Number of PULSETIMERQT instances Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Value Accuracy 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms PULSETIMERQT 10 30 0 000 90000 000 s 0 5 10 ms 15 7 8 Reset Set function block RSMEMORYQT The Reset set function RSMEMORYQT is a flip flop with memory that can reset or set an output from two inputs resp...

Page 457: ... Inverted last value 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 15 7 8 1 Function block RSMEMORYQT SET RESET OUT NOUT IEC14000069 1 en vsd IEC14000069 V1 EN Figure 166 RSMEMORYQT function block 15 7 8 2 Signals Table 329 RSMEMORYQT Input signals Name Type Default Description SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset Table 330 RSMEMORYQT Output signals Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN O...

Page 458: ...inputs respectively Each SRMEMORYQT function block has two outputs where one is inverted The memory setting controls if after a power interruption the flip flop resets or returns to the state it had before the power interruption The SET input has priority SRMEMORYQT can propagate the quality the value and the time stamps of the signals via IEC61850 Table 333 Truth table for SRMEMORYQT function blo...

Page 459: ...escription OUT BOOLEAN Output signal NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal 15 7 9 3 Settings Table 336 SRMEMORYQT Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Memory Disabled Enabled Enabled Operating mode of the memory function 15 7 9 4 Technical data Table 337 Number of SRMEMORYQT instances Logic block Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms SRMEMORYQT 10 30 15 7 10 Setta...

Page 460: ...timestamps of the signals via IEC61850 15 7 10 1 Function block TIMERSETQT INPUT ON OFF IEC14000068 1 en vsd IEC14000068 V1 EN Figure 168 TIMERSETQT function 15 7 10 2 Signals Table 338 TIMERSETQT Input signals Name Type Default Description INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal Table 339 TIMERSETQT Output signals Name Type Description ON BOOLEAN Output signal pick up delayed OFF BOOLEAN Output signal drop ...

Page 461: ...ut signal OUT is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are equal Table 342 Truth table for XORQT function block INPUT1 INPUT2 OUT NOUT 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 XORQT can propagate the quality value and time stamps of the signals via IEC61850 15 7 11 1 Function block XORQT INPUT1 INPUT2 OUT NOUT IEC09000300 1 en vsd IEC09000300 V1 EN Figure 169 XORQT function block 15 7 11 2 Sig...

Page 462: ...ion logic package When extra configurable logic blocks are required an additional package can be ordered Table 346 Number of instances in the extension logic package Logic block Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms AND 40 40 100 GATE 49 INV 40 40 100 LLD 49 OR 40 40 100 PULSETIMER 5 5 49 SLGAPC 10 10 54 SRMEMORY 110 TIMERSET 49 VSGAPC 10 10 110 XOR 49 Section 15 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Logic 456 P...

Page 463: ...oint string types of signals are available One FXDSIGN function block is included in all IEDs 15 9 3 Function block FXDSIGN OFF ON INTZERO INTONE INTALONE REALZERO STRNULL ZEROSMPL GRP_OFF IEC05000445 3 en vsd IEC05000445 V3 EN Figure 170 FXDSIGN function block 15 9 4 Signals Table 347 FXDSIGN Output signals Name Type Description OFF BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed off ON BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed...

Page 464: ...xed to integer value 0 INTONE is an integer number fixed to integer value 1 INTALONE is an integer value FFFF hex REALZERO is a floating point real number fixed to 0 0 value STRNULL is a string fixed to an empty string null value ZEROSMPL is a channel index fixed to 0 value GRP_OFF is a group signal fixed to 0 value 15 10 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I 15 10 1 Identification Function descri...

Page 465: ...k of function IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 1MRK 511 365 UUS A S...

Page 466: ... inputs INx that are activated OUT is an integer When all INx where 1 x 16 are activated that is Boolean 1 it corresponds to that integer 65535 is available on the output OUT The B16I function is designed for receiving up to 16 booleans input locally If the BLOCK input is activated it will freeze the output at the last value Values of each of the different OUTx from function block B16I for 1 x 16 ...

Page 467: ...re 1 x 16 are active that is 1 is 65535 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be converted to an integer by the B16I function block 15 10 7 Technical data Table 351 Number of B16I instances Function Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms B16I 6 4 8 15 11 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node representation BTIGAPC 15 11 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identifica...

Page 468: ...N3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 OUT IEC13000303 1 en vsd IEC13000303 V1 EN Figure 172 BTIGAPC function block 15 11 4 Signals Table 352 BTIGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Inp...

Page 469: ...6 binary inputs INx where 1 x 16 to an integer Each INx represents a value according to the table below from 0 to 32768 This follows the general formula INx 2x 1 where 1 x 16 The sum of all the values on the activated INx will be available on the output OUT as a sum of the integer values of all the inputs INx that are activated OUT is an integer When all INx where 1 x 16 are activated that is Bool...

Page 470: ... BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 512 0 IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 1024 0 IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 2048 0 IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 4096 0 IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 8192 0 IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 16384 0 IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 32768 0 The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all INx where 1 x 16 are active that is 1 is 65535 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be converted to an integer by th...

Page 471: ...ansform an integer into a set of 16 binary logical signals 15 12 3 Function block ANSI06000501 1 en vsd IB16 BLOCK INP OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 OUT9 OUT10 OUT11 OUT12 OUT13 OUT14 OUT15 OUT16 ANSI06000501 V1 EN Figure 173 IB16 function block 15 12 4 Signals Table 356 IB16 Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function INP INTEGER 0 Integer Input 1MRK 51...

Page 472: ...and Control IED Manager PCM600 15 12 6 Operation principle With integer 15 on the input INP the OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 1 and the remaining OUTx 0 for 5 x 16 OUTx represents a value when activated The value of each of the OUTx is in accordance with the table IB16_1 When not activated the OUTx has the value 0 In the above example when integer 15 is on the input INP the OUT1 has a value 1 OUT2 has a val...

Page 473: ...he sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output OUT on the function block IB16 Name of OUTx Type Description Value when activated Value when deactivated OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 1 0 OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 2 0 OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3 4 0 OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4 8 0 OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5 16 0 OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6 32 0 OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7 64 0 OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8 128 0...

Page 474: ...PC is used to transform an integer which is transmitted over IEC 61850 and received by the function to 16 binary coded logic output signals ITBGAPC function can only receive remote values over IEC 61850 when the R L Remote Local push button on the front HMI indicates that the control mode for the operator is in position R Remote i e the LED adjacent to R is lit and the corresponding signal is conn...

Page 475: ... PSTO INTEGER 1 Operator place selection Table 360 ITBGAPC Output signals Name Type Description OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3 OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4 OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5 OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6 OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7 OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8 OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9 OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10 OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11 OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12 OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13 Table cont...

Page 476: ...ral formulae OUTx 2x 1 The sum of the values of all activated OUTx 2x 1 where 1 x 16 will be equal to the integer value received over IEC61850 to the ITBGAPC_1 function block The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation function ITBGAPC will transfer an integer with a value between 0 to 65535 communicated via IEC61850 and connected to the ITBGAPC function block to a combinat...

Page 477: ...the numbers in column Value when activated when all OUTx 1 x 16 are active equals 65535 This is the highest integer that can be converted to boolean by the ITBGAPC function block The operator position input PSTO determines the operator place The integer number that is communicated to the ITBGAPC can only be written to the block while the PSTO is in position Remote If PSTO is in position Off or Loc...

Page 478: ...ation with Retain BLOCK ACCTIME RESET IN tWarning tAlarm OVERFLOW WARNING ALARM q 1 a b a b a b a b a b a b AND AND AND q 1 unit delay IEC13000290 2 en vsd 999 999 s IEC13000290 V2 EN Figure 175 TEIGAPC logics The main features of TEIGAPC Applicable to long time integration up to 999 999 9 seconds Supervision of overflow Possibility to define a warning and an alarm with the resolution of 10 millis...

Page 479: ...WARNING BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the warning limit ALARM BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the alarm limit OVERFLOW BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the overflow limit ACCTIME REAL Integrated elapsed time in seconds 15 14 5 Settings Table 365 TEIGAPC Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Dis...

Page 480: ...he last two Time Integration Transgression Supervision Plus Retain BLOCK ACCTIME RESET IN tAlarm OVERFLOW WARNING ALARM IEC12000195 3 en vsd Loop Delay Loop Delay tWarning IEC12000195 V3 EN Figure 177 TEIGAPC Simplified logic TEIGAPC main functionalities integration of the elapsed time when IN has been high applicable to long time integration 999 999 9 seconds output ACCTIME presents integrated va...

Page 481: ...ere is no check if tAlarm tWarning tAlarm and tWarning are possible to be defined with a resolution of 10 ms depending on the level of the defined values for the parameters The limit for the overflow supervision is fixed at 999999 9 seconds The outputs freeze if an overflow occurs 15 14 6 1 Operation accuracy The accuracy of TEIGAPC depends on essentially three factors function cycle time the puls...

Page 482: ...P 15 15 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Comparison of integer values INTCOMP Int 15 15 2 Functionality The function gives the possibility to monitor the level of integer values in the system relative to each other or to a fixed value It is a basic arithmetic function that can be used for monitoring supervision in...

Page 483: ...000000000 2000000000 1 100 Set value for reference 15 15 6 Operation principle The comparison can be done in two ways Between 2 inputs INPUT and REF Between INPUT and the value set by the user SetValue The selection of reference value for comparison can be done through setting RefSource If RefSource is selected as REF then the reference value for comparison is taken from second input signal REF If...

Page 484: ...naAbs RefSource SetValue T F T F a b a b a b a b a b b a IEC15000129 2 en vsdx IEC15000129 V2 EN Figure 178 Function logic diagram for INTCOMP 15 15 7 Technical data Table 371 Number of INTCOMP instances Function Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms INTCOMP 4 4 4 15 16 Comparator for real inputs REALCOMP 15 16 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identifica...

Page 485: ...e value to be compared with input value Table 373 REALCOMP Output signals Name Type Description INEQUAL BOOLEAN Input value is equal to the reference value INHIGH BOOLEAN Input value is higher than the reference value INLOW BOOLEAN Input value is lower than the reference value 15 16 5 Settings Table 374 REALCOMP Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description EnaAbs Signed Abs...

Page 486: ...s SetValue then the reference value for comparison is taken from setting SetValue Generally the inputs to the function are in SI units but when the comparison is to be done with respect to set level then the user can set a value in any unit out of Milli to Giga range in setting SetValue The unit can be separately set with setting RefPrefix Internally the function handles the reference value for co...

Page 487: ...T is above the equal high level margin then output INHIGH will set Similarly if the INPUT is below the equal low level margin then output INLOW will set In order to avoid oscillations at boundary conditions of equal band low limit and high limit hysteresis has been provided Internal Hysteresis for equal band Equal Band EqualBandHigh EqualBandLow REF or SetValue INEQUAL Reset INHIGH Set INEQUAL Set...

Page 488: ...alues from milli value level to giga value level and the maximum expectable accuracy level from the function is 10 µ Table 375 REALCOMP Technical data Function Accuracy Operate value EqualBandHigh and EqualBandLow 0 5 of set value Reset value EqualBandHigh 0 1 of set RefPrefix Reset value EqualBandLow 0 1 of set RefPrefix Table 376 Number of REALCOMP instances Function Quantity with cycle time 3 m...

Page 489: ...EN Phase current measurement CMMXU I SYMBOL SS V1 EN Phase phase voltage measurement VMMXU U SYMBOL UU V1 EN Current sequence component measurement CMSQI I1 I2 I0 SYMBOL VV V1 EN Voltage sequence component measurement VMSQI U1 U2 U0 SYMBOL TT V1 EN Phase neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU U SYMBOL UU V1 EN 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 16 Monitoring Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 483 Technic...

Page 490: ...nding on the actual hardware TRM and the logic configuration made in PCM600 All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits that is low low limit low limit high limit and high high limit A zero clamping reduction is also supported that is the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the impact of noise in the inputs Dead band supervision can be used to ...

Page 491: ... power system quantities provided depends on the actual hardware TRM and the logic configuration made in PCM600 The measuring functions CMSQI and VMSQI provide sequence component quantities I sequence currents positive zero negative sequence magnitude and angle V sequence voltages positive zero and negative sequence magnitude and angle 16 1 3 Function block The available function blocks of an IED ...

Page 492: ...NG VCA_ANGL ANSI05000701 V2 EN Figure 183 VMMXU function block IEC05000703 2 en vsd CMSQI I3P 3I0 3I0RANG 3I0ANGL I1 I1RANG I1ANGL I2 I2RANG I2ANGL IEC05000703 V2 EN Figure 184 CMSQI function block ANSI05000704 2 en vsd VMSQI V3P 3V0 3V0RANG 3V0ANGL V1 V1RANG V1ANGL V2 V2RANG V2ANGL ANSI05000704 V2 EN Figure 185 VMSQI function block Section 16 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Monitoring 486 Phasor measurement u...

Page 493: ... of deadband value P_RANGE INTEGER Active Power range Q_INST REAL Reactive Power Q REAL Reactive Power magnitude of deadband value Q_RANGE INTEGER Reactive Power range PF REAL Power Factor magnitude of deadband value PF_RANGE INTEGER Power Factor range ILAG BOOLEAN Current is lagging voltage ILEAD BOOLEAN Current is leading voltage V REAL Calculated voltage magnitude of deadband value V_RANGE INTE...

Page 494: ...Phase C current magnitude range IC_ANGL REAL Phase C current magnitude angle Table 381 VMMXU Input signals Name Type Default Description V3P GROUP SIGNAL Group connection abstract block 2 Table 382 VMMXU Output signals Name Type Description VAB REAL VAB Reported magnitude value VAB_RANG INTEGER VAB Magnitude range VAB_ANGL REAL VAB Angle magnitude of reported value VBC REAL VBC Reported magnitude ...

Page 495: ...RANG INTEGER I2 Magnitude range I2ANGL REAL I2 Angle magnitude of reported value Table 385 VMSQI Input signals Name Type Default Description V3P GROUP SIGNAL Group connection abstract block 4 Table 386 VMSQI Output signals Name Type Description 3V0 REAL 3V0 Reported magnitude value 3V0RANG INTEGER 3V0 Magnitude range 3V0ANGL REAL 3V0 Magnitude angle V1 REAL V1 Reported magnitude value V1RANG INTEG...

Page 496: ...ameters of the measurement function MMXU MSQI are depending on the actual hardware TRM and the logic configuration made in PCM600 These six functions are not handled as a group so parameter settings are only available in the first setting group The following terms are used in the Unit and Description columns VBase Base voltage in primary kV This voltage is used as reference for voltage setting It ...

Page 497: ...ing type PFMin 1 000 1 000 0 001 1 000 Minimum value PFMax 1 000 1 000 0 001 1 000 Maximum value PFRepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband Cyclic Reporting type VMin 0 0 200 0 VB 0 1 50 0 Minimum value in of VBase VMax 0 0 200 0 VB 0 1 200 0 Maximum value in of VBase VRepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband Cyclic Reporting type IMin 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 5 0 Minimum value in of IBase IMax 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 2...

Page 498: ...e 1 10 Cycl Report interval s Db In of range Int Db In s PZeroDb 0 100000 m 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0 001 of range PHiHiLim 2000 0 2000 0 SB 0 1 150 0 High High limit in of SBase PHiLim 2000 0 2000 0 SB 0 1 120 0 High limit in of SBase PLowLim 2000 0 2000 0 SB 0 1 120 0 Low limit in of SBase PLowLowLim 2000 0 2000 0 SB 0 1 150 0 Low Low limit in of SBase PLimHyst 0 000 100 000 0 001 5 000 Hys...

Page 499: ... In of range Int Db In s IZeroDb 0 100000 m 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0 001 of range IHiHiLim 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 150 0 High High limit in of IBase IHiLim 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 120 0 High limit in of IBase ILowLim 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 80 0 Low limit in of IBase ILowLowLim 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 60 0 Low Low limit in of IBase ILimHyst 0 000 100 000 0 001 5 000 Hysteresis value in of range common for all limits Fr...

Page 500: ...e 1 10 Cycl Report interval s Db In of range Int Db In s Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Disbled Enabled operation IA_Max 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 200 0 Maximum value in of IBase IA_RepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband Cyclic Reporting type GlobalBaseSel 1 12 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups IA_AngDbRepInt 1 300 Type 1 10 Cycl Report interval s Db In of range Int Db In s IB_DbRepIn...

Page 501: ... Angle calibration for current at 100 of In IA_LimHys 0 000 100 000 0 001 5 000 Hysteresis value in of range and is common for all limits IB_ZeroDb 0 100000 m 1 1 Zero point clamping IB_HiHiLim 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 150 0 High High limit in of IBase IB_HiLim 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 120 0 High limit in of IBase IB_LowLim 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 80 0 Low limit in of IBase IB_LowLowLim 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 60 0 Low Low lim...

Page 502: ...yclic Reporting type VBC_AnDbRepInt 1 300 Type 1 10 Cycl Report interval s Db In of range Int Db In s VCA_DbRepInt 1 300 Type 1 10 Cycl Report interval s Db In of range Int Db In s VC_ZeroDb 0 100000 m 1 1 Zero point clamping VCA_Max 0 0 200 0 VB 0 1 200 0 Maximum value in of VBase VCA_RepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband Cyclic Reporting type VCA_AnDbRepInt 1 300 Type 1 10 Cycl Report interval s ...

Page 503: ...nimum value in of VBase VCA_LimHys 0 000 100 000 0 001 5 000 Hysteresis value in of range and is common for all limits Table 395 CMSQI Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description 3I0DbRepInt 1 300 Type 1 10 Cycl Report interval s Db In of range Int Db In s 3I0ZeroDb 0 100000 m 1 1 Zero point clamping 3I0Min 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 50 0 Minimum value in of IBase 3I0Max 0 0 500...

Page 504: ...Minimum value in of IBase I2Max 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 200 0 Maximum value in of IBase I2RepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband Cyclic Reporting type I2LimHys 0 000 100 000 0 001 5 000 Hysteresis value in of range and is common for all limits I2AngDbRepInt 1 300 Type 1 10 Cycl Report interval s Db In of range Int Db In s I2AngMin 180 000 180 000 Deg 0 001 180 000 Minimum value I2AngRepTyp Cyclic Dead band...

Page 505: ...I Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description 3V0DbRepInt 1 300 Type 1 10 Cycl Report interval s Db In of range Int Db In s 3V0ZeroDb 0 100000 m 1 1 Zero point clamping 3V0Min 0 0 200 0 VB 0 1 50 0 Minimum value in of VBase 3V0Max 0 0 200 0 VB 0 1 200 0 Maximum value in of VBase 3V0RepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband Cyclic Reporting type GlobalBaseSel 1 12 1 1 Select...

Page 506: ...000 100 000 0 001 5 000 Hysteresis value in of range and is common for all limits V2AngDbRepInt 1 300 Type 1 10 Cycl Report interval s Db In of range Int Db In s V2AngMin 180 000 180 000 Deg 0 001 180 000 Minimum value V2AngMax 180 000 180 000 Deg 0 001 180 000 Maximum value V2AngRepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband Cyclic Reporting type UAmpPreComp5 10 000 10 000 0 001 0 000 Amplitude factor to p...

Page 507: ...AngZeroDb 0 100000 m 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0 001 of range Table 399 VNMMXU Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description VA_DbRepInt 1 300 Type 1 10 Cycl Report interval s Db In of range Int Db In s Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Disbled Enabled operation VA_ZeroDb 0 100000 m 1 1 Zero point clamping VA_Max 0 0 200 0 VB 0 1 200 0 Maximum value in of VBase VA_Rep...

Page 508: ...50 0 High High limit in of UBase VA_HiLim 0 0 200 0 VB 0 1 120 0 High limit in of VBase VA_LowLim 0 0 200 0 VB 0 1 80 0 Low limit in of VBase VA_LowLowLim 0 0 200 0 VB 0 1 60 0 Low Low limit in of VBase VMagComp100 10 000 10 000 0 001 0 000 Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100 of Vn VA_Min 0 0 200 0 VB 0 1 50 0 Minimum value in of VBase VB_HiHiLim 0 0 200 0 VB 0 1 150 0 High High limit in ...

Page 509: ...ed data Name Type Values Range Unit Description IA REAL A Phase A current magnitude of reported value IA_ANGL REAL deg Phase A current magnitude angle IB REAL A Phase B current magnitude of reported value IB_ANGL REAL deg Phase B current magnitude angle IC REAL A Phase C current magnitude of reported value IC_ANGL REAL deg Phase C current magnitude angle Table 403 VMMXU Monitored data Name Type Va...

Page 510: ...L A I1magnitude of reported value I1ANGIM REAL I1 Angle magnitude of instantaneous value I1ANGL REAL deg I1 Angle magnitude of reported value I2IMAG REAL I2 Amplitude magnitude of instantaneous value I2 REAL A I2 Magnitude of reported value I2ANGIM REAL I2 Angle magnitude of instantaneous value I2ANGL REAL deg I2 Angle magnitude of reported value Table 405 VMSQI Monitored data Name Type Values Ran...

Page 511: ... magnitude of reported value VB REAL kV VB Amplitude magnitude of reported value VB_ANGL REAL deg VB Angle magnitude of reported value VC REAL kV VC Amplitude magnitude of reported value VC_ANGL REAL deg V_C Angle magnitude of reported value 16 1 7 Operation principle 16 1 7 1 Measurement supervision The protection control and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and further process infor...

Page 512: ... VC VAB VBC VCA I1 I2 3I0 V1 V2 or 3V0 Observe that this measurement supervision zero point clamping might be overridden by the zero point clamping used for the measurement values within CVMMXN Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity available in the function block by means of four defined operating thresholds see figure 187 The monitorin...

Page 513: ...es according to figure 187 The user can set the hysteresis XLimHyst which determines the difference between the operating and reset value at each operating point in wide range for each measuring channel separately The hysteresis is common for all operating values within one channel Actual value of the measured quantity The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely The...

Page 514: ...et value for t XDbRepInt t t t t IEC05000500 V2 EN Figure 188 Periodic reporting Magnitude dead band supervision If a measuring value is changed compared to the last reported value and the change is larger than the ΔY pre defined limits that are set by user UDbRepIn then the measuring channel reports the new value to a higher level This limits the information flow to a minimum necessary Figure 189...

Page 515: ...e process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other The last value reported Y1 in figure 190 serves as a basic value for further measurement A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly measured value and is multiplied by the time increment discrete integral The absolute values of these integral values are added...

Page 516: ...unction must be connected to three phase current and three phase voltage input in the configuration tool group signals but it is capable to measure and calculate above mentioned quantities in nine different ways depending on the available VT inputs connected to the IED The end user can freely select by a parameter setting which one of the nine available measuring modes shall be used within the fun...

Page 517: ...d when only symmetrical three phase power shall be measured 4 AB AB A B S V I I EQUATION1567 V1 EN Equation 67 2 AB A B V V I I I EQUATION1568 V1 EN Equation 68 Used when only VAB phase to phase voltage is available 5 BC BC B C S V I I EQUATION1569 V1 EN Equation 69 2 BC B C V V I I I EQUATION1570 V1 EN Equation 70 Used when only VBC phase to phase voltage is available 6 CA CA C A S V I I EQUATION...

Page 518: ...3 to 9 it calculates the three phase power under assumption that the power system is fully symmetrical Once the complex apparent power is calculated then the P Q S PF are calculated in accordance with the following formulas Re P S EQUATION1403 V1 EN Equation 79 Im Q S EQUATION1404 V1 EN Equation 80 2 2 S S P Q EQUATION1405 V1 EN Equation 81 cos P PF S j EQUATION1406 V1 EN Equation 82 Additionally ...

Page 519: ... Measured current of In 0 5 Constant 5 30 100 Linear 100 Constant 100 30 5 IAngComp5 IAngComp30 IAngComp100 10 10 Angle compensation Degrees Measured current of In ANSI05000652_3_en vsd ANSI05000652 V3 EN Figure 191 Calibration curves The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and the magnitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals Lo...

Page 520: ... for power P Q and S and power factor are forced to zero as well Since the measurement supervision functionality included in CVMMXN is using these values the zero clamping will influence the subsequent supervision observe the possibility to do zero point clamping within measurement supervision see section Measurement supervision Compensation facility In order to compensate for small magnitude and ...

Page 521: ...site directional convention for active and reactive power measurements This can be easily achieved by setting parameter PowAngComp to value of 180 0 degrees With such setting the active and reactive power will have positive values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar Frequency Frequency is actually not calculated within measurement block It is simply obtained from the pre pr...

Page 522: ...e and current sequence measurements VMSQI CMSQI The measurement functions must be connected to three phase current CMSQI or voltage VMSQI input in the configuration tool to be operable No outputs other than X_RANG are calculated within the measuring blocks and it is not possible to calibrate the signals Input signals are obtained from the pre processing block and transferred to corresponding outpu...

Page 523: ...0 2 of S Power factor cos φ 10 to 300 V 0 1 4 0 x In 0 02 100 to 220 V 0 5 2 0 x In 0 01 Table 408 CMMXU technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Current at symmetrical load 0 1 4 0 In 0 3 of In at I 0 5 In 0 3 of I at I 0 5 In Phase angle at symmetrical load 0 1 4 0 In 1 0 degrees at 0 1 In I 0 5 In 0 5 degrees at 0 5 In I 4 0 In Table 409 VMMXU technical data Function Range or value Accur...

Page 524: ...ro sequence 3V0 10 to 300 V 0 5 of V at V 50 V 0 2 of V at V 50 V Voltage negative sequence V2 10 to 300 V 0 5 of V at V 50 V 0 2 of V at V 50 V Phase angle 10 to 300 V 0 5 degrees at V 50 V 0 2 degrees at V 50 V Table 412 VNMMXU technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Voltage 5 to 175 V 0 5 of V at V 50 V 0 2 of V at V 50 V Phase angle 5 to 175 V 0 5 at V 50 V 0 2 at V 50 V 16 2 Gas mediu...

Page 525: ...medium from CB PRES_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Pressure alarm signal PRES_LO BOOLEAN 0 Pressure lockout signal SET_P_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set pressure lockout SET_T_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set temperature lockout RESET_LO BOOLEAN 0 Reset pressure and temperature lockout Table 414 SSIMG 63 Output signals Name Type Description PRESSURE REAL Pressure service value PRES_ALM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level PRES_LO BOOLEAN Pressure...

Page 526: ...e circuit breaker Binary inputs of gas density PRES_ALM PRES_LO and gas pressure signal PRESSURE are taken into account to initiate the alarms PRES_ALM and PRES_LO When PRESSURE is less than PressAlmLimit or binary signal from CB PRES_ALM is high then the gas pressure alarm PRES_ALM will be initiated Similarly if pressure input PRESSURE is less than PressLOLimit or binary signal from CB PRES_LO is...

Page 527: ...een used with the setting for relative and absolute hysteresis The binary input BLK_ALM can be used to block the alarms and the BLOCK input can block both alarms and the lockout indication 16 2 6 Technical data Table 416 SSIMG 63 Technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Pressure alarm level 1 00 100 00 10 0 of set value Pressure lockout level 1 00 100 00 10 0 of set value Temperature alarm ...

Page 528: ...VEL LVL_ALM LVL_LO TEMP TEMP_ALM TEMP_LO ANSI09000128 V1 EN Figure 194 SSIML 71 function block 16 3 3 Signals Table 417 SSIML 71 Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function BLK_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms LEVEL REAL 0 0 Level input from CB TEMP REAL 0 0 Temperature of the insulation medium from CB LVL_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Level alarm signal LEVEL_LO BOOLEAN 0 Leve...

Page 529: ...0 Time delay for temperature alarm tTempLockOut 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Time delay for temperture lockout tResetLevelAlm 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Reset time delay for level alarm tResetLevelLO 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Reset time delay for level lockout tResetTempLO 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Reset time delay for temperture lockout tResetTempAlm 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Reset time delay fo...

Page 530: ...mall time for which the function need not to initiate any alarm That is why two time delaystTempAlarm or tTempLockOuthave been included If the temperature goes above the settings for more than these time delays then only the corresponding alarm TEMP_ALM or lockout TEMP_LO will be initiated The SET_T_LO binary input is used for setting the temperature lockout The TEMP_LO output retains the last val...

Page 531: ...ker condition The breaker requires maintenance when the number of operations reaches a predefined value For a proper functioning of the circuit breaker it is essential to monitor the circuit breaker operation spring charge indication or breaker wear travel time number of operation cycles and estimate the accumulated energy during arcing periods 16 4 3 Function block SSCBR I3P BLOCK BLKALM TRIND PO...

Page 532: ...t of CB spring charging time Table 422 SSCBR Output signals Name Type Description OPENPOS BOOLEAN CB is in open position CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN CB is in closed position INVDPOS BOOLEAN CB is in Invalid Position TRCMD BOOLEAN Open command issued to CB TRVTOPAL BOOLEAN CB open travel time exceeded set value TRVTCLAL BOOLEAN CB close travel time exceeded set value OPERALM BOOLEAN Number of CB operations ex...

Page 533: ...ion selection CurrExponent 0 50 3 00 0 01 2 00 Current exponent value used for energy calculation AccStopCurr 5 00 100 00 IB 0 01 10 00 RMS current level below which energy accumulation stops AlmAccCurrPwr 0 00 20000 00 0 01 2500 00 Alarm level for accumulated I CurrExponent integrated over CB open travel time LOAccCurrPwr 0 00 20000 00 0 01 2500 00 Lockout level for accumulated I CurrExponent int...

Page 534: ...le 425 SSCBR Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description TTRVOP REAL ms Travel time of the CB during opening operation TTRVCL REAL ms Travel time of the CB during closing operation NOOPER INTEGER Number of CB operation cycle CBLIFEPH INTEGER CB Remaining life of respective phase INADAYS INTEGER The number of days CB has been inactive IPOWPH REAL Accumulated I CurrExponent integrated ove...

Page 535: ...POWPH TRIND OPENPOS CLOSEPOS INVDPOS CB Status CB Operation Monitoring CB Operation Cycles Accumulated energy Remaining Life of CB RSTCBWR IPOWLOPH IPOWALPH MONALM INADAYS PRESALM PRESLO GPRESALM GPRESLO SPCHALM SPCHT RSTSPCHT CB Spring Charge Monitoring RSTIPOW TRCMD IEC12000624 3 en vsd 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 16 Monitoring Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 529 Technical manual ...

Page 536: ...al module diagram for circuit breaker contact travel time Contact travel time calculation The contact travel time of the breaker is calculated from the time between the state of change of auxiliary contacts The opening travel time is measured between the opening of the POSCLOSE and closing of the POSOPEN auxiliary contacts Similarly the closing travel time is measured between the opening of the PO...

Page 537: ...losing time is calculated by adding the value set with the CloseTimeCorr t3 t4 setting to the measured closing time The last measured opening travel time TTRVOP and the closing travel time TTRVCL are given as service values The values can be reset using the Clear menu on the LHMI or by activation the input RSTCBWR Alarm limit check When the measured opening travel time is longer than the value set...

Page 538: ...sed when the POSOPEN input is low and the POSCLOSE input is high The breaker is in the error state if both auxiliary contacts have the same value or if the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is low and the POSOPEN input is high but the current is above the setting AccStopCurr The status of the breaker is indicated with the binary outputs OPENPOS CLOSEPOS and INVDPOS for open closed and error positio...

Page 539: ... number of operations the breaker can perform at the rated current The OperNoFault parameter sets the number of operations the breaker can perform at the rated fault current Alarm limit check When the remaining life of a circuit breaker phase drops below the CBLifeAlmLevel setting the life alarm CBLIFEAL is activated It is possible to deactivate the CBLIFEAL alarm signal by activating the binary i...

Page 540: ...ens If the setting is positive the calculation of energy starts after the auxiliary contact has opened and the delay equal to the value of theContTrCorr setting has passed When the setting is negative the calculation starts in advance by the correction time in relation to when the auxiliary contact opened Main Contact close open POSCLOSE 1 0 Energy Accumulation starts ContTrCorr Negative Main Cont...

Page 541: ...ing opening sequences of the breaker The operation counter value is updated after each closing opening sequence The operation is described in Figure 203 POSCLOSE POSOPEN RSTCBWR BLOCK BLKALM Operation counter Alarm limit Check NOOPER OPERALM OPERLO IEC12000617 V2 EN Figure 203 Functional module diagram for circuit breaker operation cycles Operation counter The operation counter counts the number o...

Page 542: ... BLKALM Inactive timer Alarm limit Check INADAYS MONALM IEC12000614 V2 EN Figure 204 Functional module diagram for circuit breaker operation monitoring Inactive timer The Inactive timer module calculates the number of days the circuit breaker has remained in the same open or closed state The value is calculated by monitoring the states of the POSOPEN and POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts The number of i...

Page 543: ...rom the difference of these two signal timings Spring charging indication is described in Figure205 The last measured spring charging time SPCHT is provided as a service value The spring charging time SPCHT can be reset on the LHMI or by activating the input RSTSPCHT Alarm limit check If the time taken by the spring to charge is more than the value set with the SpChAlmTime setting the subfunction ...

Page 544: ...tivation of the BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers The alarm signals from the function can be blocked by activating the binary input BLKALM 16 4 8 Technical data Table 426 SSCBR Technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Alarm level for open and close travel time 0 200 ms 3 ms Alarm level for number of operations 0 9999 Independent time delay for spring charging ti...

Page 545: ...ese events are created from any available signal in the IED that is connected to the Event function EVENT The event function block is used for remote communication Analog and double indication values are also transferred through EVENT function 16 5 3 Function block IEC05000697 2 en vsd EVENT BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT1...

Page 546: ...Input 5 INPUT6 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 6 INPUT7 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 7 INPUT8 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 8 INPUT9 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 9 INPUT10 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 10 INPUT11 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 11 INPUT12 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 12 INPUT13 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 13 INPUT14 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 14 INPUT15 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 15 INPUT16 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 16 Section 16 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Monitoring 540 Pha...

Page 547: ...nts OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 3 EventMask4 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 4 EventMask5 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 5 EventMask6 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 6 EventMask7 NoEvents OnSet OnRese...

Page 548: ...et OnReset OnChange AutoDetect AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 15 EventMask16 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 16 MinRepIntVal1 0 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 1 MinRepIntVal2 0 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 2 MinRepIntVal3 0 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 3 MinRepIntVal4 0 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporti...

Page 549: ...t from the IED can originate from both internal logical signals and binary input channels The internal signals are time tagged in the main processing module while the binary input channels are time tagged directly on the input module The time tagging of the events that are originated from internal logical signals have a resolution corresponding to the execution cycle time of the source application...

Page 550: ...asily saturate the event system or the communication subsystems behind it a quota limiter is implemented If an input creates events at a rate that completely consume the granted quota then further events from the channel will be blocked This block will be removed when the input calms down and the accumulated quota reach 66 of the maximum burst quota The maximum burst quota per input channel is 45 ...

Page 551: ...e storage capacity A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input to the AnRADR or BnRBDR function blocks which are set to trigger the disturbance recorder All connected signals from pickup of pre fault time to the end of post fault time will be included in the recording Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the standard Comtrade format as a reader file HDR a configurati...

Page 552: ...T34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 IEC05000431 V3 EN Figure 210 A4RADR function block derived analog inputs IEC05000432 3 en vsd B1RBDR INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 IEC05000432 V3 EN Figure 211 B1RBDR function block binary inputs example for B1RBDR B8RBDR Section 16 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Monitor...

Page 553: ...L Group signal for input 3 GRPINPUT4 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for input 4 GRPINPUT5 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for input 5 GRPINPUT6 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for input 6 GRPINPUT7 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for input 7 GRPINPUT8 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for input 8 GRPINPUT9 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for input 9 GRPINPUT10 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for input 10 A2RADR and A3RADR functions have th...

Page 554: ... channel 2 INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 3 INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 4 INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 5 INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 6 INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 7 INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 8 INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 9 INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 10 INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 11 INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 12 INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 13 INPUT14...

Page 555: ... time limit PostRetrig Disabled Enabled Disabled Post fault retrig enabled On or not Off MaxNoStoreRec 10 100 1 100 Maximum number of stored disturbances ZeroAngleRef 1 30 Ch 1 1 Trip value recorder phasor reference channel OpModeTest Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation mode during test mode Table 434 A1RADR Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation01 Disab...

Page 556: ...nder trigger level for analog channel 2 in of signal OverTrigOp02 Disabled Enabled Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 2 on or not off OverTrigLe02 0 5000 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 2 in of signal NomValue03 0 0 999999 9 0 1 0 0 Nominal value for analog channel 3 UnderTrigOp03 Disabled Enabled Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 3 on or not off Under...

Page 557: ... 0 1 0 0 Nominal value for analog channel 7 UnderTrigOp07 Disabled Enabled Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 7 on or not off UnderTrigLe07 0 200 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 7 in of signal OverTrigOp07 Disabled Enabled Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 7 on or not off OverTrigLe07 0 5000 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 7 in of signal No...

Page 558: ...ation20 A3RADR Operation21 to Operation30 A4RADR Operation31 to Operation40 A2RADR to A4RADR functions have the same Non group settings advanced as A1RADR but with different numbering examples given in brackets A2RADR 11 to 20 NomValue11 nominal value for analog channel 11 A3RADR 21 to 30 NomValue21 nominal value for analog channel 21 A4RADR 31 to 40 NomValue31 nominal value for analog channel 31 ...

Page 559: ...rigDR07 Disabled Enabled Disabled Trigger operation On Off SetLED07 Disabled Pickup Trip Pickup and Trip Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 7 TrigDR08 Disabled Enabled Disabled Trigger operation On Off SetLED08 Disabled Pickup Trip Pickup and Trip Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 8 TrigDR09 Disabled Enabled Disabled Trigger operation On Off SetLED09 Disabled Pickup Trip Pickup an...

Page 560: ... Disabled Pickup Trip Pickup and Trip Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 15 TrigDR16 Disabled Enabled Disabled Trigger operation On Off SetLED16 Disabled Pickup Trip Pickup and Trip Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 16 FunType1 0 255 1 0 Function type for binary channel 1 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo1 0 255 1 0 Information number for binary channel 1 IEC 60870 5 103 FunType2 0 255 1 0 Fu...

Page 561: ...ation number for binary channel 9 IEC 60870 5 103 FunType10 0 255 1 0 Function type for binary channel 10 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo10 0 255 1 0 Information number for binary channel 10 IEC 60870 5 103 FunType11 0 255 1 0 Function type for binary channel 11 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo11 0 255 1 0 Information number for binary channel 11 IEC 60870 5 103 FunType12 0 255 1 0 Function type for binary channel 12 ...

Page 562: ...Level04 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Trig on 1 Trigger on positive 1 or negative 0 slope for binary input 4 IndicationMa04 Hide Show Show Indication mask for binary channel 4 TrigLevel05 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Trig on 1 Trigger on positive 1 or negative 0 slope for binary input 5 IndicationMa05 Hide Show Show Indication mask for binary channel 5 TrigLevel06 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Trig on 1 Trigger on positive 1 ...

Page 563: ...y channel 14 TrigLevel15 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Trig on 1 Trigger on positive 1 or negative 0 slope for binary input 15 IndicationMa15 Hide Show Show Indication mask for binary channel 15 TrigLevel16 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Trig on 1 Trigger on positive 1 or negative 0 slope for binary input 16 IndicationMa16 Hide Show Show Indication mask for binary channel 16 B2RBDR to B8RBDR functions have the same No...

Page 564: ...ig for analog channel 2 activated OvTrigStatCh2 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 2 activated UnTrigStatCh3 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 3 activated OvTrigStatCh3 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 3 activated UnTrigStatCh4 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 4 activated OvTrigStatCh4 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 4 activated UnTrigStatCh5 BOOLE...

Page 565: ...EAN Over level trig for analog channel 13 activated UnTrigStatCh14 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 14 activated OvTrigStatCh14 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 14 activated UnTrigStatCh15 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 15 activated OvTrigStatCh15 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 15 activated UnTrigStatCh16 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 16 ...

Page 566: ...OOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 24 activated UnTrigStatCh25 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 25 activated OvTrigStatCh25 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 25 activated UnTrigStatCh26 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 26 activated OvTrigStatCh26 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 26 activated UnTrigStatCh27 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel ...

Page 567: ...5 activated OvTrigStatCh35 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 35 activated UnTrigStatCh36 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 36 activated OvTrigStatCh36 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 36 activated UnTrigStatCh37 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 37 activated OvTrigStatCh37 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 37 activated UnTrigStatCh38 BOOLEAN Under le...

Page 568: ...rder TVR Disturbance recorder DR Figure 212 shows the relations between Disturbance Report included functions and function blocks Sequential of events SOE Event recorder ER and Indications IND uses information from the binary input function blocks BxRBDR Trip value recorder TVR uses analog information from the analog input function blocks AxRADR Disturbance recorder DRPRDRE acquires information fr...

Page 569: ...s of auxiliary power Each report will get an identification number in the interval from 0 999 Up to 100 disturbance reports can be stored If a new disturbance is to be recorded when the memory is full the oldest disturbance report is overwritten by the new one The total recording capacity for the disturbance recorder is depending of sampling frequency number of analog and binary channels and recor...

Page 570: ... cause disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk space Disturbance information Date and time of the disturbance the indications events fault location and the trip values are available on the local HMI To acquire a complete disturbance report the user must use a PC and either the PCM600 Disturbance handling tool or a FTP or MMS over 61850 client The PC can be connected to the IED fro...

Page 571: ...der records analog and binary signal data before during and after the fault Time tagging The IED has a built in real time calendar and clock This function is used for all time tagging within the disturbance report Recording times Disturbance report DRPRDRE records information about a disturbance during a settable time frame The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report Disturbance...

Page 572: ...ording was triggered The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that does not reset within a reasonable time interval It limits the maximum recording time of a recording and prevents subsequent overwriting of already stored disturbances Use the setting TimeLimit to set this time Analog signals Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance recorder ...

Page 573: ...ble If the IED is preconfigured the only tool needed for analog configuration of the Disturbance report is the Signal Matrix Tool SMT external signal configuration In case of modification of a preconfigured IED or general internal configuration the Application Configuration tool within PCM600 is used The preprocessor function block SMAI calculates the residual quantities in cases where only the th...

Page 574: ...port Operation Operation TrigDR Enabled A binary signal can be selected to activate the red LED on the local HMI SetLED Enabled The selected signals are presented in the event recorder sequential of events and the disturbance recording But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are used as triggers The indications are also selected from these 128 signals with local HMI IndicationMask S...

Page 575: ...ethod of checking the analog trigger conditions gives a function which is insensitive to DC offset in the signal The trip time for this initiation is typically in the range of one cycle 16 2 3 ms for a 60 Hz network All under over trig signal information is available on the local HMI and PCM600 Post Retrigger Disturbance report function does not automatically respond to any new trig condition duri...

Page 576: ...er of events in the Sequence of events 1000 first in first out Maximum total recording time 3 4 s recording time and maximum number of channels typical value 340 seconds 100 recordings at 50 Hz 280 seconds 80 recordings at 60 Hz Sampling rate 1 kHz at 50 Hz 1 2 kHz at 60 Hz Recording bandwidth 5 300 Hz 16 7 Logical signal status report BINSTATREP 16 7 1 Identification Function description IEC 6185...

Page 577: ... input 2 INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 3 INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 4 INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 5 INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 6 INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 7 INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 8 INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 9 INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 10 INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Sin...

Page 578: ...13 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 13 OUTPUT14 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 14 OUTPUT15 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 15 OUTPUT16 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 16 16 7 5 Settings Table 442 BINSTATREP Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description t 0 0 60 0 s 0 1 10 0 Time delay of function 16 7 6 Operation principle The Logical signal status re...

Page 579: ...d IEC 61850 generic communication I O functions MVGAPC are provided with measurement supervision functionality All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits low low limit low limit high limit and high high limit The measure value expander block RANGE_XP has been introduced to enable translating the integer output signal from the measuring functions to 5 binary signals below low l...

Page 580: ...en low and low low limit LOWLOW BOOLEAN Measured value is below low low limit 16 8 5 Operation principle The input signal must be connected to a range output of a measuring function block CVMMXN CMMXU VMMXU VNMMXU CMSQI VMSQ or MVGAPC The function block converts the input integer value to five binary output signals according to table 445 Table 445 Input integer value converted to binary output sig...

Page 581: ... included for each up counter 16 9 3 Operation principle Limit counter L4UFCNT counts the number of positive and or negative sides on the binary input signal depending on the function settings L4UFCNT also checks if the accumulated value is equal or greater than any of its four settable limits The four limit outputs will be activated relatively on reach of each limit and remain activated until the...

Page 582: ...activates a steady overflow indication for the next count Rolls over to zero and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count Rolls over to zero and activates a pulsed overflow indication for the next count The pulsed overflow output lasts up to the first count after rolling over to zero as illustrated in figure 220 IEC12000626_1_en vsd Max value 3 Max value 1 Max value Max value 1 Ma...

Page 583: ...elease of the block input 16 9 3 2 Reporting The content of the counter can be read on the local HMI Reset of the counter can be performed from the local HMI or via a binary input Reading of content and resetting of the function can also be performed remotely for example from a IEC 61850 client The value can also be presented as a measurement on the local HMI graphical display 16 9 4 Function bloc...

Page 584: ... Operation Disabled Enabled CountType Positive edge Negative edge Both edges Positive edge Select counting on positive and or negative sides CounterLimit1 1 65535 1 100 Value of the first limit CounterLimit2 1 65535 1 200 Value of the second limit CounterLimit3 1 65535 1 300 Value of the third limit CounterLimit4 1 65535 1 400 Value of the fourth limit MaxValue 1 65535 1 500 Maximum count value On...

Page 585: ...10 2 Functionality The Running hour meter TEILGAPC function is a function that accumulates the elapsed time when a given binary signal has been high see also figure 222 Time Accumulation with Retain BLOCK ACC_HOUR RESET IN tWarning tAlarm OVERFLOW WARNING ALARM q 1 a b a b a b a b a b a b q 1 unit delay IEC15000321 1 en vsd ACC_DAY 99 999 9 h tAddToTime ADDTIME IEC15000321 V1 EN Figure 222 TEILGAP...

Page 586: ...le 451 TEILGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Freeze the accumulation and block the outputs IN BOOLEAN 0 The input signal that is used to measure the elapsed time when its value is high ADDTIME BOOLEAN 0 Add time to the accumulation RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset accumulated time Table 452 TEILGAPC Output signals Name Type Description ALARM BOOLEAN Indicator that accumulated t...

Page 587: ... Time to add to the accumulation 16 10 6 Operation principle Figure 224 describes the simplified logic of the function Time Accumulation Transgression Supervision Plus Retain BLOCK ACC_HOUR RESET IN tAlarm OVERFLOW WARNING ALARM IEC15000322 vsd Loop Delay Loop Delay tWarning ACC_DAY ADDTIME tAddToTime IEC15000322 V1 EN Figure 224 TEILGAPC Simplified logic TEILGAPC main functionalities IN Accumulat...

Page 588: ...s independent of the input IN value BLOCK request overrides RESET request Monitor and report the conditions of limit transgression overflow if output ACC_HOUR 99 999 9 hours alarm if output ACC_HOUR tAlarm warning if output ACC_HOUR tWarning The ACC_HOUR output represents the accumulated time in hours and the ACC_DAY output represents the accumulated time in days tAlarm and tWarning are user setta...

Page 589: ... time Consequently in case of a power failure there is a risk of losing the difference in time between actual time and last time stored in the non volatile memory 16 10 7 Technical data Table 454 TEILGAPC Technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Time limit for alarm supervision tAlarm 0 99999 9 hours 0 1 of set value Time limit for warning supervision tWarning 0 99999 9 hours 0 1 of set val...

Page 590: ...584 ...

Page 591: ...alculation of energy consumption values The pulses are captured by the binary input module and then read by the PCFCNT function A scaled service value is available over the station bus The special Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities must be ordered to achieve this functionality 17 1 3 Function block PCFCNT BLOCK READ_VAL BI_PULSE RS_CNT INVALID RESTART BLOCKED NEW_VAL SCA...

Page 592: ...led value with time and status information 17 1 5 Settings Table 457 PCFCNT Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation Disabled Enabled EventMask NoEvents ReportEvents NoEvents Report mask for analog events from pulse counter CountCriteria Disabled RisingEdge Falling edge OnChange RisingEdge Pulse counter criteria Scale 1 ...

Page 593: ...unter uses a 32 bit format that is the reported value is a 32 bit signed integer with a range 0 2147483647 The counter is reset at initialization of the IED The reported value to station HMI over the station bus contains Identity Scaled Value pulse count x scale Time and Pulse Counter Quality The Pulse Counter Quality consists of Invalid board hardware error or configuration error Wrapped around B...

Page 594: ...L performs one additional reading per positive flank The signal must be a pulse with a length 1 second The BI_PULSE input is connected to the used input of the function block for the Binary Input Module BIM The RS_CNT input is used for resetting the counter Each pulse counter logic function block has four binary output signals that can be connected to an Event function block for event recording IN...

Page 595: ...Function Setting range Accuracy Input frequency See Binary Input Module BIM Cycle time for report of counter value 1 3600 s 17 2 Function for energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR 17 2 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Function for energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR W_Varh 17 2 2 Functionality ...

Page 596: ...ese energy values are available as output signals and also as pulse outputs Integration of energy values can be controlled by inputs STARTACC and STOPACC and EnaAcc setting and it can be reset to initial values with RSTACC input The maximum demand for active and reactive powers are calculated for the set time interval tEnergy and these values are updated every minute through output channels The ac...

Page 597: ...for active forward energy exceed limit in set interval EARALM BOOLEAN Alarm for active reverse energy exceed limit in set interval ERFALM BOOLEAN Alarm for reactive forward energy exceed limit in set interval ERRALM BOOLEAN Alarm for reactive reverse energy exceed limit in set interval EAFACC REAL Accumulated forward active energy value in Ws EARACC REAL Accumulated reverse active energy value in ...

Page 598: ...rd accumulated energy value ERRAccPlsQty 0 001 10000 000 MVArh 0 001 100 000 Pulse quantity for reactive reverse accumulated energy value Table 463 ETPMMTR Non group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description EALim 0 001 10000000000 000 MWh 0 001 1000000 000 Active energy limit ERLim 0 001 10000000000 000 MVArh 0 001 1000 000 Reactive energy limit EnZeroClamp Disabled Enable...

Page 599: ...energy value in VArS ERRACC REAL MVArh Accumulated reverse reactive energy value in VArS MAXPAFD REAL MW Maximum forward active power demand value for set interval MAXPARD REAL MW Maximum reverse active power demand value for set interval MAXPRFD REAL MVAr Maximum forward reactive power demand value for set interval MAXPRRD REAL MVAr Maximum reactive power demand value in reverse direction 17 2 7 ...

Page 600: ...naAcc setting is enabled When the RSTACC input is in the active state the output ACCINPRG is low even if the integration of energy is enabled ACCINPRG is deactivated by activating the STOPACC input T F STARTACC ACCINPRG RSTACC 1 q 1 STOPACC FALSE EnaAcc IEC13000186 4 en vsd q 1 unit delay IEC13000186 V4 EN Figure 229 ACCINPRG Logic diagram The accumulated energy values in MWh and MVArh are availab...

Page 601: ...ues and energy per pulse ExxAccPlsQty setting The accumulated energy values are divided by the energy per pulse value to get the number of pulses The number of pulses can be reset to zero by activating RSTACC input or by using the local HMI reset menu The pulse on and off time duration is set by the settings tEnergyOnPls and tEnergyOffPls Figure 231 shows the logic for pulse output generation for ...

Page 602: ...everse direction When the RSTDMD input is active from the local HMI reset menu these outputs are reset to zero The energy alarm is activated once the periodic energy value crosses the energy limit ExLim Figure 232 shows the logic of alarm for active forward energy exceeds limit and Maximum forward active power demand value Similarly the maximum power calculation and energy alarm outputs in the act...

Page 603: ...ta Table 465 Function Range or value Accuracy Energy metering MWh Export Import MVarh Export Import Input from MMXU No extra error at steady load 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 17 Metering Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 597 Technical manual ...

Page 604: ...598 ...

Page 605: ...mmunication protocol DNP3 0 communication protocol C37 118 communication protocol Several protocols can be combined in the same IED 18 2 Communication protocol diagnostics Status of the protocols can be viewed in the LHMI under Main menu Diagnostics IED status Protocol diagnostics The diagnostic values are Diagnostic value Description Off Protocol is turned off Error An error has occured refer to ...

Page 606: ...by a setting in PCM600 The IED is equipped with double optical Ethernet rear ports for IEC 61850 8 1 station bus communication The IEC 61850 8 1 communication is also possible from the electrical Ethernet front port IEC 61850 8 1 protocol allows intelligent electrical devices IEDs from different vendors to exchange information and simplifies system engineering IED to IED communication using GOOSE ...

Page 607: ...4 3 Settings Table 467 IEC61850 8 1 Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation Disabled Enabled PortSelGOOSE Front LANAB LANCD LANAB Port selection for GOOSE communication PortSelMMS Front LANAB LANCD Any Any Port selection for MMS communication ProtocolEdition Ed 1 Ed 2 Ed 1 Protocol Edition RemoteModControl Disabled Main...

Page 608: ...unication speed for the IEDs 100 Mbit s 18 4 5 Generic communication function for Single Point indication SPGAPC SP16GAPC 18 4 5 1 Function block SPGAPC BLOCK IN IEC14000021 1 en vsd IEC14000021 V1 EN Figure 234 SPGAPC function block SP16GAPC BLOCK IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 IEC14000020 1 en vsd IEC14000020 V1 EN Figure 235 SP16GAPC function block Sectio...

Page 609: ...nput 7 status IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 status IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 status IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 status IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 status IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 status IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 status IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 status IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 status IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 status 18 4 5 3 Settings The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600 18 4 5 4 Monit...

Page 610: ... 8 status OUT9 GROUP SIGNAL Output 9 status OUT10 GROUP SIGNAL Output 10 status OUT11 GROUP SIGNAL Output 11 status OUT12 GROUP SIGNAL Output 12 status OUT13 GROUP SIGNAL Output 13 status OUT14 GROUP SIGNAL Output 14 status OUT15 GROUP SIGNAL Output 15 status OUT16 GROUP SIGNAL Output 16 status OUTOR GROUP SIGNAL Output status logic OR gate for input 1 to 16 18 4 6 Generic communication function f...

Page 611: ...0 00 xBase 0 01 800 00 High limit multiplied with the base prefix multiplication factor MV lLim 5000 00 5000 00 xBase 0 01 800 00 Low limit multiplied with the base prefix multiplication factor MV llLim 5000 00 5000 00 xBase 0 01 900 00 Low Low limit multiplied with the base prefix multiplication factor MV min 5000 00 5000 00 xBase 0 01 1000 00 Minimum value multiplied with the base prefix multipl...

Page 612: ...tion description LHMI and ACT identification IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Parallel Redundancy Protocol Status PRPSTATUS RCHLCCH Duo driver configuration PRP 18 4 7 1 Functionality Redundant station bus communication according to IEC 62439 3 Edition 1 and IEC 62439 3 Edition 2 parallel redundancy protocol PRP are available as options when ordering ...

Page 613: ...on Disabled Enabled PRPMode PRP 0 PRP 1 PRP 1 PRP Mode IPAddress 0 18 IP Address 1 192 168 7 10 IP Address IPMask 0 18 IP Address 1 255 255 255 0 IP Mask 18 4 7 5 Monitored data Table 477 PRPSTATUS Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description AB Beh INTEGER 2 Blocked 3 Test 4 Test blocked 5 Off 1 On AB Link Beh CD Beh INTEGER 1 On 2 Blocked 3 Test 4 Test blocked 5 Off CD Link Beh PRP Beh...

Page 614: ... are the same the last package is discarded The PRP communication is based on the so called duo driver concept The PRPSTATUS function block supervise the redundant communication on the two channels If no data package has been received on one or both channels within the last 10 s the output PRP A LINK and or PRP B LINK is set to 0 which indicates an error Section 18 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Station commu...

Page 615: ...9000758 V3 EN Figure 238 Redundant station bus 18 5 IEC 61850 9 2LE communication protocol 18 5 1 Introduction The IEC 61850 9 2LE process bus communication protocol enables an IED to communicate with devices providing measured values in digital format commonly 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 18 Station communication Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 609 Technical manual ...

Page 616: ...Name Type Description I1 STRING Analogue input I1 I2 STRING Analogue input I2 I3 STRING Analogue input I3 I4 STRING Analogue input I4 V1 STRING Analogue input V1 V2 STRING Analogue input V2 V3 STRING Analogue input V3 V4 STRING Analogue input V4 MUDATA BOOLEAN Fatal error serious data loss SYNCH BOOLEAN MU clock synchronized to same clock as IED SMPLLOST BOOLEAN Sample lost MUSYNCH BOOLEAN Synchro...

Page 617: ...1 STRING Analogue input V1 V2 STRING Analogue input V2 V3 STRING Analogue input V3 V4 STRING Analogue input V4 MUDATA BOOLEAN Fatal error serious data loss SYNCH BOOLEAN Operational mode on ethernet link SMPLLOST BOOLEAN Sample lost MUSYNCH BOOLEAN Synchronization lost in MU TESTMODE BOOLEAN MU in test mode Table 481 MU4_4I_4U Output signals Name Type Description I1 STRING Analogue input I1 I2 STR...

Page 618: ...input V4 MUDATA BOOLEAN Fatal error serious data loss SYNCH BOOLEAN Operational mode on ethernet link SMPLLOST BOOLEAN Sample lost MUSYNCH BOOLEAN Synchronization lost in MU TESTMODE BOOLEAN MU in test mode Table 483 MU6_4I_4U Output signals Name Type Description I1 STRING Analogue input I1 I2 STRING Analogue input I2 I3 STRING Analogue input I3 I4 STRING Analogue input I4 V1 STRING Analogue input...

Page 619: ...cted object FromObject the opposite Table 485 MU1_4I_4U Non group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description SynchMode NoSynch Init Operation Operation Synchronization mode Table 486 MU2_4I_4U Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description SVId 10 34 1 ABB_MU0102 MU identifier SmplGrp 0 65535 1 0 Sampling group CT_WyePoint1 FromObject ToObject ToObj...

Page 620: ...rds protected object FromObject the opposite Table 489 MU3_4I_4U Non group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description SynchMode NoSynch Init Operation Operation Synchronization mode Table 490 MU4_4I_4U Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description SVId 10 34 1 ABB_MU0104 MU identifier SmplGrp 0 65535 1 0 Sampling group CT_WyePoint1 FromObject ToObj...

Page 621: ...rds protected object FromObject the opposite Table 493 MU5_4I_4U Non group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description SynchMode NoSynch Init Operation Operation Synchronization mode Table 494 MU6_4I_4U Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description SVId 10 34 1 ABB_MU0106 MU identifier SmplGrp 0 65535 1 0 Sampling group CT_WyePoint1 FromObject ToObj...

Page 622: ...SMPLLOST BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Sample lost MUSYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Ok 1 Error Synchronization lost in MU TESTMODE BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No MU in test mode Table 497 MU2_4I_4U Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description MUDATA BOOLEAN 0 Ok 1 Error Fatal error serious data loss SYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Ok 1 Error Operational mode on ethernet link SMPLLOST BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Sample lost MUSYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Ok 1 Err...

Page 623: ... data loss SYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Ok 1 Error Operational mode on ethernet link SMPLLOST BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Sample lost MUSYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Ok 1 Error Synchronization lost in MU TESTMODE BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No MU in test mode Table 500 MU5_4I_4U Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description MUDATA BOOLEAN 0 Ok 1 Error Fatal error serious data loss SYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Ok 1 Error Operational mode on ethernet...

Page 624: ... isolators etc The MUs have the capability to gather measured values from measuring transformers non conventional transducers or both The gathered data are then transmitted to subscribers over the process bus utilizing the IEC 61850 9 2LE protocol ABB physical MU contains up to 3 logical MUs each capable of sampling 4 currents and 4 voltages The IED communicates with the MUs over the process bus v...

Page 625: ... 1PPS 1PPS 110 V 1 A Station Wide GPS Clock en08000072 2 vsd OEM Module Preprocessing blocks SMAI Application MU1 MU2 1 A TRM module Preprocessing blocks SMAI IED CD IEC08000072 V2 EN Figure 239 Example of signal path for sampled analogue values from MU and conventional CT VT 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 18 Station communication Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 619 Technical manual ...

Page 626: ...TESTMODE Indicates that the MU connected is in TestMode Received from quality flag in datastream No IED setting affects this signal Timeout TSYNCERR Indicates that there is some timeout on any configured time source or the time quality is worse than specified in SynchAccLevel The timeout is individually specified per time source PPS IRIG B SNTP etc See section Time synchronization Blocking conditi...

Page 627: ...over a range of requirements The protocol follows the reference model for open system interconnection OSI designed by the International Standardization Organization ISO In this document the most common addresses for commands and events are available For other addresses refer to section It is assumed that the reader is familiar with LON communication protocol in general 18 6 2 Settings Table 503 HO...

Page 628: ...it messages are used to transfer longer pieces of information such as events and explicit read and write messages to access device data The benefits achieved from using the LON bus in protection and control systems include direct communication among all terminals in the system and support for multi master implementations The LON bus also has an open concept so that the terminals can communicate wi...

Page 629: ...nt function blocks Addresses to the other inputs on the event function block are consecutive after the first input For example input 15 on event block EVENT 17 has the address 1280 14 15 1 1294 For double indications only the first eight inputs 1 8 must be used Inputs 9 16 can be used for other types of events at the same event block Three event function blocks EVENT 1 to EVENT 3 running with a fa...

Page 630: ...f the signal OnChange at both pick up and drop out of the signal AutoDetect event system itself make the reporting decision reporting criteria for integers has no semantic prefer to be set by the user The following type of signals from application functions can be connected to the event function block Single indication Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block SMBI is alw...

Page 631: ... command messages R or W and the reply messages D A or N are sent using the same message code It is mandatory that one device sends out only one SPA bus message at a time to one node and waits for the reply before sending the next message For commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control That is the function blocks type SCSWI 1 to 30 SXCBR 1 to 18 and SXSWI 1 to 24 the SPA ...

Page 632: ...rning for example interlocking between two IEDs MULTICMDSND 7 BAY E1 MULTICMDSND 9 BAY E3 LON BAY E4 MULTICMDSND 9 en05000718 vsd IEC05000718 V2 EN Figure 240 Examples connections between MULTICMDSND and MULTICMDRCV function blocks in three IEDs The network variable connections are done from the NV Connection window From LNT window select Connections NVConnections New Section 18 1MRK 511 365 UUS A...

Page 633: ...he drag and drop method where they can select all nodes in the device window drag them to the Download area in the bottom of the program window and drop them there or they can perform it by selecting the traditional menu Configuration Download 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 18 Station communication Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 627 Technical manual ...

Page 634: ...cal fibre to the RX receiver input and the outgoing optical fibre to the TX transmitter output Pay special attention to the instructions concerning handling and connection of fibre cables Table 506 SPA addresses for commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control Name Function block SPA address Description BL_CMD SCSWI01 1 I 5115 SPA parameters for block command BL_CMD SCSWI0...

Page 635: ...D SCSWI15 1 I 5451 SPA parameters for block command BL_CMD SCSWI16 1 I 5475 SPA parameters for block command BL_CMD SCSWI17 1 I 5499 SPA parameters for block command BL_CMD SCSWI18 1 I 5523 SPA parameters for block command BL_CMD SCSWI19 1 I 5545 SPA parameters for block command BL_CMD SCSWI20 1 I 5571 SPA parameters for block command BL_CMD SCSWI21 1 I 5594 SPA parameters for block command BL_CMD...

Page 636: ...SWI05 1 I 5202 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI06 1 I 5226 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI07 1 I 5250 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI08 1 I 5275 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI09 1 I 5299 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI10 1 I 5323 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI11 1 I 5347 SPA parameters for cancel command CAN...

Page 637: ...for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI29 1 I 5779 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI30 1 I 5803 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI31 1 I 5827 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI32 1 I 5851 SPA parameters for cancel command SELECTOpen 00 SELECTClose 01 SELOpen ILO 10 SELClose ILO 11 SELOpen SCO 20 SELClose SCO 21 SELOpen ILO SCO 30 SELClose ILO SCO 31 SCSWI01 1 I 5105 SP...

Page 638: ...I 5441 SPA parameters for select Open Close command SELECTOpen 00 SELECTClose 01 so on SCSWI16 1 I 5465 SPA parameters for select Open Close command SELECTOpen 00 SELECTClose 01 so on SCSWI17 1 I 5489 SPA parameters for select Open Close command SELECTOpen 00 SELECTClose 01 so on SCSWI18 1 I 5513 SPA parameters for select Open Close command SELECTOpen 00 SELECTClose 01 so on SCSWI19 1 I 5535 SPA p...

Page 639: ... SPA parameters for operate Open Close command ExcOpen 00 ExcClose 01 so on SCSWI04 1 I 5177 SPA parameters for operate Open Close command ExcOpen 00 ExcClose 01 so on SCSWI05 1 I 5201 SPA parameters for operate Open Close command ExcOpen 00 ExcClose 01 so on SCSWI06 1 I 5225 SPA parameters for operate Open Close command ExcOpen 00 ExcClose 01 so on SCSWI07 1 I 5249 SPA parameters for operate Open...

Page 640: ...se 01 so on SCSWI25 1 I 5682 SPA parameters for operate Open Close command ExcOpen 00 ExcClose 01 so on SCSWI26 1 I 5706 SPA parameters for operate Open Close command ExcOpen 00 ExcClose 01 so on SCSWI27 1 I 5730 SPA parameters for operate Open Close command ExcOpen 00 ExcClose 01 so on SCSWI28 1 I 5754 SPA parameters for operate Open Close command ExcOpen 00 ExcClose 01 so on SCSWI29 1 I 5778 SPA...

Page 641: ...I 120 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXCBR16 3 I 133 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXCBR17 3 I 158 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXCBR18 3 I 179 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXSWI01 3 I 196 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXSWI02 3 I 216 SPA parameter for position to be substi...

Page 642: ...ub Value SXSWI19 3 I 530 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXSWI20 3 I 549 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXSWI21 3 I 568 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXSWI22 3 I 587 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXSWI23 3 I 606 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXSWI24 3 I 625 SPA parameter for po...

Page 643: ...12 3 I 55 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXCBR13 3 I 75 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXCBR14 3 I 93 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXCBR15 3 I 121 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXCBR16 3 I 132 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXCBR17 3 I 159 SPA parameter for substitute enable c...

Page 644: ...3 I 474 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXSWI17 3 I 493 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXSWI18 3 I 512 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXSWI19 3 I 531 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXSWI20 3 I 550 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXSWI21 3 I 569 SPA parameter for substitute enable c...

Page 645: ...ock SXCBR10 3 I 27 SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXCBR11 3 I 44 SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXCBR12 3 I 57 SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXCBR13 3 I 73 SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXCBR14 3 I 92 SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXCBR15 3 I 122 SPA parameter for update block command Update...

Page 646: ...WI14 3 I 434 SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXSWI15 3 I 453 SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXSWI16 3 I 472 SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXSWI17 3 I 491 SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXSWI18 3 I 510 SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXSWI19 3 I 529 SPA parameter for update block command Update B...

Page 647: ...1 Functionality 103MEAS is a function block that reports all valid measuring types depending on connected signals The set of connected input will control which ASDUs Application Service Data Units are generated 9 Will be generated if at least IA is connected IB IC VA VB VC P Q F are optional but there can be no holes 3 4 Will be generated if IN and VN are present 3 3 Will be generated if IB VAB P ...

Page 648: ...rvice value for current phase A IB REAL 0 0 Service value for current phase B IC REAL 0 0 Service value for current phase C IN REAL 0 0 Service value for residual current IN VA REAL 0 0 Service value for voltage phase A VB REAL 0 0 Service value for voltage phase B VC REAL 0 0 Service value for voltage phase C V_AB REAL 0 0 Service value for voltage phase phase AB V_N REAL 0 0 Service value for re...

Page 649: ...Maximum residual voltage VN MaxP 0 00 2000 00 MW 0 05 1200 00 Maximum value for active power MaxQ 0 00 2000 00 MVAr 0 05 1200 00 Maximum value for reactive power MaxF 45 0 66 0 Hz 1 0 51 0 Maximum system frequency 18 7 3 Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870 5 103 I103MEASUSR 18 7 3 1 Functionality I103MEASUSR is a function block with user defined input measurands in monitor direction Thes...

Page 650: ... measurement on input 5 INPUT6 REAL 0 0 Service value for measurement on input 6 INPUT7 REAL 0 0 Service value for measurement on input 7 INPUT8 REAL 0 0 Service value for measurement on input 8 INPUT9 REAL 0 0 Service value for measurement on input 9 18 7 3 5 Settings Table 510 I103MEASUSR Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description FunctionType 1 255 1 25 Function ty...

Page 651: ...00 0 05 1000 00 Maximum value for measurement on input 9 18 7 4 Function status auto recloser for IEC 60870 5 103 I103AR 18 7 4 1 Functionality I103AR is a function block with defined functions for autorecloser indications in monitor direction This block includes the FunctionType parameter and the information number parameter is defined for each output signal 18 7 4 2 Identification Function descr...

Page 652: ...us ground fault for IEC 60870 5 103 I103EF 18 7 5 1 Functionality I103EF is a function block with defined functions for ground fault indications in monitor direction This block includes the FunctionType parameter and the information number parameter is defined for each output signal 18 7 5 2 Identification Function description Function block name IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device num...

Page 653: ...tion block is specific for a certain fault type and therefore must be connected to a correspondent signal present in the configuration For example 68_TRGEN represents the General Trip of the device and therefore must be connected to the general trip signal SMPPTRC_TRIP or equivalent The delay observed in the protocol is the time difference in between the signal that is triggering the Disturbance R...

Page 654: ...64_PU_A BOOLEAN 0 Information number 64 pickup phase A 65_PU_B BOOLEAN 0 Information number 64 pickup phase B 66_PU_C BOOLEAN 0 Information number 64 pickup phase C 67_STIN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 67 start residual current IN 68_TRGEN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 68 trip general 69_TR_A BOOLEAN 0 Information number 69 trip phase A 70_TR_B BOOLEAN 0 Information number 70 trip phase B 71_TR_C B...

Page 655: ...tem phase C 89_MTRN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 89 trip measuring system neutral N 90_IOC BOOLEAN 0 Information number 90 over current trip stage low 91_IOC BOOLEAN 0 Information number 91 over current trip stage high 92_IEF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 92 ground fault trip stage low 93_IEF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 93 ground fault trip stage high ARINPROG BOOLEAN 0 Autorecloser in progress SM...

Page 656: ...rmation number 19 reset LEDs 21_TESTM BOOLEAN 0 Information number 21 test mode is active 22_SETCH BOOLEAN 0 Information number 22 setting changed 23_GRP1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 23 setting group 1 is active 24_GRP2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 24 setting group 2 is active 25_GRP3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 25 setting group 3 is active 26_GRP4 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 26 setting group 4...

Page 657: ...ERV BLOCK 32_MEASI 33_MEASU 37_IBKUP 38_VTFF 46_GRWA 47_GRAL IEC10000293 V1 EN Figure 249 I103SUPERV function block 18 7 8 4 Signals Table 519 I103SUPERV Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting 32_MEASI BOOLEAN 0 Information number 32 measurand supervision of I 33_MEASU BOOLEAN 0 Information number 33 measurand supervision of V 37_IBKUP BOOLEAN 0 Infor...

Page 658: ...mation Number INF Additionally all input signals may be defined to use relative time and how to respond to a GI request The user is responsible for assigning a proper FUN value and proper INF values to all connected inputs See Settings for details 18 7 9 2 Identification Function description Function block name IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Status for user defined signals ...

Page 659: ...standard 18 7 9 5 Settings Table 522 I103USRDEF Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description FunctionType 1 255 1 5 Function type 1 255 InfNo1 1 255 1 1 Information number for binary input 1 1 255 InfNo2 1 255 1 2 Information number for binary input 2 1 255 InfNo3 1 255 1 3 Information number for binary input 3 1 255 InfNo4 1 255 1 4 Information number for binary input ...

Page 660: ...us change GI GiNo7 Excluded Included Included Response and status change GI GiNo8 Excluded Included Included Response and status change GI The FunctionType parameter associates a particular instance of the function block with a FUN Refer to the IEC60870 5 103 standard for details The InfNon parameters are used to associate each individual input signal with a userdefined INF Refer to the IEC60870 5...

Page 661: ...FF 18 PROT IEC10000282 V1 EN Figure 251 I103CMD function block 18 7 10 4 Signals Table 523 I103CMD Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands Table 524 I103CMD Output signals Name Type Description 16 AR BOOLEAN Information number 16 disable enable autorecloser 17 DIFF BOOLEAN Information number 17 block of differential protection 18 PROT BOOLEAN Information numbe...

Page 662: ... GRP1 24 GRP2 25 GRP3 26 GRP4 IEC10000283 V1 EN Figure 252 I103IEDCMD function block 18 7 11 4 Signals Table 526 I103IEDCMD Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands Table 527 I103IEDCMD Output signals Name Type Description 19 LEDRS BOOLEAN Information number 19 reset LEDs 23 GRP1 BOOLEAN Information number 23 activate setting group 1 24 GRP2 BOOLEAN Information...

Page 663: ...rmation number parameter for each output signal 18 7 12 2 Identification Function description Function block name IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Function commands user defined for IEC 60870 5 103 I103USRCMD 18 7 12 3 Function block IEC10000284 1 en vsd I103USRCMD BLOCK OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3 OUTPUT4 OUTPUT5 OUTPUT6 OUTPUT7 OUTPUT8 IEC10000284 V1 EN Figure 253 I103USRCMD fu...

Page 664: ...mber for output 1 1 255 InfNo_2 1 255 1 2 Information number for output 2 1 255 InfNo_3 1 255 1 3 Information number for output 3 1 255 InfNo_4 1 255 1 4 Information number for output 4 1 255 InfNo_5 1 255 1 5 Information number for output 5 1 255 InfNo_6 1 255 1 6 Information number for output 6 1 255 InfNo_7 1 255 1 7 Information number for output 7 1 255 InfNo_8 1 255 1 8 Information number for...

Page 665: ...fication Function description Function block name IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Function commands generic for IEC 60870 5 103 I103GENCMD 18 7 13 3 Function block IEC10000285 1 en vsd I103GENCMD BLOCK CMD_OFF CMD_ON IEC10000285 V1 EN Figure 254 I103GENCMD function block 18 7 13 4 Signals Table 532 I103GENCMD Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block ...

Page 666: ...intermediate and faulty states may be suppressed by setting the Report Intermediate Position to Off See the settings for RS485 and optical serial communication for more information The Select input is a single indication signal and is also GI enabled State transitions to ON and OFF are reported spontaneously When the Block input is ON the function will ignore GI requests and cease all monitoring a...

Page 667: ... 7 15 Operation principle 18 7 15 1 General IEC 60870 5 103 is an unbalanced master slave protocol for coded bit serial communication exchanging information with a control system and with a data transfer rate up to 38400 bit s In IEC terminology a primary station is a master and a secondary station is a slave The communication is based on a point to point principle The master must have software th...

Page 668: ... when corresponding functions are included in the protection and control IED Be aware of that different cycle times for function blocks must be considered to ensure correct time stamping Commands in control direction Commands in control direction I103IEDCMD Command block in control direction with defined output signals Number of instances 1 Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType Inf...

Page 669: ...unction type for each function block instance in private range is selected with parameter FunctionType Information number must be selected for each output signal Default values are 1 8 Table 539 I103USRCMD supported indications INF Description 11 Output signal 01 2 Output signal 02 3 Output signal 03 4 Output signal 04 5 Output signal 05 6 Output signal 06 7 Output signal 07 8 Output signal 08 1 U...

Page 670: ...ionType Information number is required for each input signal Table 541 I103USRDEF Information number default values INF Description GI TYP COT 11 Input signal 01 x 1 2 1 7 9 2 Input signal 02 x 1 2 1 7 9 3 Input signal 03 x 1 2 1 7 9 4 Input signal 04 x 1 2 1 7 9 5 Input signal 05 x 1 2 1 7 9 6 Input signal 06 x 1 2 1 7 9 7 Input signal 07 x 1 2 1 7 9 8 Input signal 08 x 1 2 1 7 9 1 User defined i...

Page 671: ...rmation number is defined for each output signal Table 543 I103EF supported indications INF Description 51 Ground fault forward 52 Ground fault reverse Fault indications in monitor direction type 1 I103FltDis Fault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions The instance type is suitable for distance protection function FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block INFORMATION...

Page 672: ... functions The instance type is suitable for line differential transformer differential overcurrent and ground fault protection functions FUNCTION TYPE setting for each block INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal Number of instances 1 Info no Message Supported 64 Pickup A Yes 65 Pickup B Yes 66 Pickup C Yes 67 Pickup IN Yes 84 General pickup Yes 69 Trip A Yes 70 Trip B Yes 71 Trip C ...

Page 673: ...ecloser 130 Autorecloser blocked Measurands Function blocks in monitor direction for input measurands Typically connected to monitoring function for example to power measurement CVMMXN Measurands in public range I103MEAS Number of instances 1 The IED reports all valid measuring types depending on connected signals Upper limit for measured currents active reactive power is 2 4 times rated value Upp...

Page 674: ... is maxVal 4095 and hence the lowest possible maxVal yields the best accuracy Table 545 I103MEAS supported indications INF Description 148 I_A 144 145 146 148 I_B 148 I_C 147 IN Neutral current 148 V_A 148 V_B 148 V_C 145 146 V_A V_B 147 UN Neutral voltage 146 148 P active power 146 148 Q reactive power 148 f frequency Measurands in private range I103MEASUSR Number of instances 3 Function type par...

Page 675: ...2 and Input4 are connected Input3 is not connected Number of information elements will be 3 Input3 NOT connected 1 2 that is only Input1 and Input2 will be transmitted Disturbance recordings The following elements are used in the ASDUs Application Service Data Units defined in the standard Analog signals 40 channels the channel number for each channel has to be specified Channels used in the publi...

Page 676: ...r example when a disturbance is deleted by other client for example SPA or when a new disturbance has been recorded or when the master has uploaded a disturbance Deviations from the standard Information sent in the disturbance upload is specified by the standard however some of the information are adapted to information available in disturbance recorder in the IED series This section describes all...

Page 677: ...g ASDU26 which contains an information element named NOF number of grid faults This number must indicate fault number in the power system that is a fault in the power system with several trip and auto reclosing has the same NOF while the FAN must be incremented NOF is just as FAN equal to disturbance number Interoperability physical layer Supported Electrical Interface EIA RS 485 No number of load...

Page 678: ... of a channel Yes 28 Ready for transm of tags Yes 29 Transmission of tags Yes 30 Transmission fo disturbance data Yes 31 End of transmission Yes Selection of standard ASDUs in control direction ASDU Yes 6 Time synchronization Yes 7 General interrogation Yes 10 Generic data No 20 General command Yes 21 Generic command No 24 Order for disturbance data transmission Yes 25 Acknowledgement for distance...

Page 679: ...fibre to the TX transmitter output When the fibre optic cables are laid out pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling and connection of the optical fibres The module is identified with a number on the label on the module 18 8 Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV 18 8 1 Function block GOOSEBINRCV BLOCK OUT1 DVALID1 OUT2 DVALID2 OUT3 DVALID3 OUT4 DVALID4 OUT5 DVALID5 OUT6 DVALID6...

Page 680: ... on binary output 6 OUT7 BOOLEAN Binary output 7 DVALID7 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 7 OUT8 BOOLEAN Binary output 8 DVALID8 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 8 OUT9 BOOLEAN Binary output 9 DVALID9 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 9 OUT10 BOOLEAN Binary output 10 DVALID10 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 10 OUT11 BOOLEAN Binary output 11 DVALID11 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output ...

Page 681: ...ion block to receive a double point value GOOSEDPRCV 18 9 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number GOOSE function block to receive a double point value GOOSEDPRCV 18 9 2 Functionality GOOSEDPRCV is used to receive a double point value using IEC61850 protocol via GOOSE 18 9 3 Function block IEC10000249 1 en vsd GOOSEDPRCV ...

Page 682: ...will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of a cross to receive the double point values The implementation...

Page 683: ...ck IEC10000250 1 en vsd GOOSEINTRCV BLOCK INTOUT DATAVALID COMMVALID TEST IEC10000250 V1 EN Figure 258 GOOSEINTRCV function block 18 10 4 Signals Table 553 GOOSEINTRCV Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function Table 554 GOOSEINTRCV Output signals Name Type Description INTOUT INTEGER Integer output DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for integer output COMMVALID BOOLEAN...

Page 684: ...OSE block must be linked in SMT by means of a cross to receive the integer values The implementation for IEC61850 quality data handling is restricted to a simple level If quality data validity is GOOD then the DATAVALID output will be HIGH If quality data validity is INVALID QUESTIONABLE OVERFLOW FAILURE or OLD DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW 18 11 GOOSE function block to receive a meas...

Page 685: ...als Name Type Description MVOUT REAL Measurand value output DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for measurand value output COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for measurand value output TEST BOOLEAN Test output 18 11 5 Settings Table 558 GOOSEMVRCV Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation Disabled Enabled 18 11 6 Operation pr...

Page 686: ...VALID QUESTIONABLE OVERFLOW FAILURE or OLD DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW 18 12 GOOSE function block to receive a single point value GOOSESPRCV 18 12 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number GOOSE function block to receive a single point value GOOSESPRCV 18 12 2 Functionality GOOSESPRCV is used to receive a si...

Page 687: ...ll be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of a cross to receive the binary single point values The implement...

Page 688: ... MULTICMDRCV which has 16 binary outputs 18 13 2 Design 18 13 2 1 General The common behavior for all 16 outputs of the MULTICMDRCV is set to either of two modes Steady or Pulse 1 Steady This mode simply forwards the received signals to the binary outputs 2 Pulse When a received signal transitions from 0 zero to 1 one a pulse with a duration of exactly one execution cycle is triggered on the corre...

Page 689: ...nction block IEC06000008 2 en vsd MULTICMDSND BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 ERROR IEC06000008 V2 EN Figure 262 MULTICMDSND function block 18 13 4 Signals Table 562 MULTICMDRCV Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 18 Station communication...

Page 690: ...LEAN 0 Input 14 INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 Table 564 MULTICMDRCV Output signals Name Type Description ERROR BOOLEAN MultiReceive error NEWDATA BOOLEAN New data is received OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3 OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4 OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5 OUTPUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6 OUTPUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7 OUTPUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8 O...

Page 691: ...0 s 0 001 0 200 Pulse length for multi command outputs Table 567 MULTICMDSND Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description tMaxCycleTime 0 000 200 000 s 0 001 5 000 Maximum time interval between transmission of output data tMinCycleTime 0 000 200 000 s 0 001 0 000 Minimum time interval between transmission of output data 18 13 6 Operation principle There are 10 instances...

Page 692: ...CALARM Output signals Name Type Description EVENTID INTEGER EventId of the generated security event SEQNUMBER INTEGER Sequence number of the generated security event 18 14 1 2 Settings Table 569 SECALARM Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Enabled Operation On Off 18 15 Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG 18 15 1 Activity logging ACT...

Page 693: ...log server 3 port number ExtLogSrv3IP 0 18 IP Address 1 127 0 0 1 External log server 3 IP address ExtLogSrv4Type Disabled ExtLogSrv1Type SYSLOG TCP IP CEF TCP IP Disabled External log server 4 type ExtLogSrv4Port 1 65535 1 514 External log server 4 port number ExtLogSrv4IP 0 18 IP Address 1 127 0 0 1 External log server 4 IP address ExtLogSrv5Type Disabled ExtLogSrv1Type SYSLOG TCP IP CEF TCP IP ...

Page 694: ...688 ...

Page 695: ...fferential protection IED or for the transmission of only binary signals up to 192 in the other IEDs The binary signals are freely configurable and can thus be used for any purpose for example communication scheme related signals transfer trip and or other binary signals between IEDs Communication between two IEDs requires that each IED is equipped with a Line Data Communication Module LCDM The LD...

Page 696: ...CERROR TRDELERR SYNCERR REMCOMF REMGPSER SUBSTITU LOWLEVEL IEC07000044 V2 EN Figure 263 LDCMRecBinStat function blocks IEC05000451 2 en vsd LDCMRecBinStat3 COMFAIL YBIT NOCARR NOMESS ADDRERR LNGTHERR CRCERROR TRDELERR SYNCERR REMCOMF REMGPSER SUBSTITU LOWLEVEL IEC05000451 V2 EN Figure 264 LDCMRecBinStat function block Section 19 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Remote communication 690 Phasor measurement unit R...

Page 697: ...H3 STRING Remote communication channel 3 CH4 STRING Remote communication channel 4 COMFAIL BOOLEAN Detected error in the differential communication YBIT BOOLEAN Detected error in remote end with incoming message NOCARR BOOLEAN No carrier is detected in the incoming message NOMESS BOOLEAN No start and stop flags identified for the incoming message ADDRERR BOOLEAN Incoming message from non valid add...

Page 698: ...CERR BOOLEAN Error in echo synchronization REMCOMF BOOLEAN Remote terminal indicates problem with received message REMGPSER BOOLEAN Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS synchronization SUBSTITU BOOLEAN Link error values are substituted LOWLEVEL BOOLEAN Low signal level on the receive link 19 1 5 Settings Table 574 LDCMRecBinStat1 Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default D...

Page 699: ... Master Slave Com Synchronization mode of LDCM 0 Slave 1 Master OptoPower LowPower HighPower LowPower Transmission power for LDCM 0 Low 1 High TransmCurr CT GRP1 CT GRP2 CT SUM CT DIFF1 CT DIFF2 CT GRP1 Summation mode for transmitted current values ComFailAlrmDel 5 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before communication error signal is activated ComFailResDel 5 500 ms 5 100 Reset delay before communication e...

Page 700: ...nal is lost CommSync Slave Master Slave Com Synchronization mode of LDCM 0 Slave 1 Master OptoPower LowPower HighPower LowPower Transmission power for LDCM 0 Low 1 High TransmCurr CT GRP1 CT GRP2 CT SUM CT DIFF1 CT DIFF2 RedundantChannel CT GRP1 Summation mode for transmitted current values ComFailAlrmDel 5 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before communication error signal is activated ComFailResDel 5 500 ...

Page 701: ... Type Values Range Unit Description CommStatus BOOLEAN 0 Ok 1 SyncErr 2 No RXD 3 LocalGPSErr 4 RemGPSErr 5 LocAndRemG PSErr 6 LocalADErr 7 RemADErr 8 LocAndRemA DErr 9 AddressErr 10 FreqConfErr 11 LatencyConf Err Status of communication link Table 578 LDCMRecBinStat2 Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description CommStatus BOOLEAN 0 Ok 1 SyncErr 2 No RXD 3 LocalGPSErr 4 RemGPSErr 5 LocAnd...

Page 702: ... V1 EN Figure 265 Data message structure The start and stop flags are the 0111 1110 sequence 7E hexadecimal defined in the HDLC standard The CRC is designed according to the standard CRC16 definition The optional address field in the HDLC frame is not used instead a separate addressing is included in the data field The address field is used for checking that the received message originates from th...

Page 703: ...the Application Configuration tool except for the LDCMTRN function block that is visible in ACT The signals appear only in the Signal Matrix tool when a LDCM is included in the configuration with the function selector tool 19 2 2 Signals Table 580 LDCMTRN Input signals Name Type Default Description CT1L1 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT group1 line L1 to remote end CT1L2 STRING 0 Input to...

Page 704: ...put to be used for transmit CT group2 line L2 to remote end CT2L3 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT group2 line L3 to remote end CT2N STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT group2 neutral N to remote end Section 19 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Remote communication 698 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 705: ...ers both the IED and the tools that are accessing the IED are protected by means of authorization handling The authorization handling of the IED and the PCM600 is implemented at both access points to the IED local through the local HMI remote through the communication ports The IED users can be created deleted and edited with PCM600 IED user management tool 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 20 Basic IED ...

Page 706: ...s of the IED and tools functionality The pre defined user types are given in Table 581 Ensure that the user logged on to the IED has the access required when writing particular data to the IED from PCM600 The meaning of the legends used in the table R Read W Write No access rights Section 20 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Basic IED functions 700 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 707: ...R R W R W File loading database loading from XML file R W R W R W File dumping database dumping to XML file R W R W R W File transfer FTP file transfer R W R W R W R W R W File transfer limited FTP file transfer R R W R R W R W R W R W File Transfer SPA File Transfer R W R W Database access for normal user R R W R R W R W R W R W User administration user management FTP File Transfer R R W R R R R ...

Page 708: ...tempts to perform an operation that is password protected the Log on window will appear The cursor is focused on the User identity field so upon pressing the key the user can change the user name by browsing the list of users with the up and down arrows After choosing the right user name the user must press the E key again When it comes to password upon pressing the key the following character wil...

Page 709: ...3 Predefined user roles according to IEC 62351 8 User roles Role explanation User rights VIEWER Viewer Can read parameters and browse the menus from LHMI OPERATOR Operator Can read parameters and browse the menus as well as perform control actions ENGINEER Engineer Can create and load configurations and change settings for the IED and also run commands and manage disturbances INSTALLER Installer C...

Page 710: ...t not all users in the SDM600 server are part of the replica There might be users that are not assigned to any replication group IED only replicates those users which are part of replication group configured in the IED This replication can be disabled using PCM600 by the security administrator which means that the IED will forward login requests to the SDM600 for authorization and in case of probl...

Page 711: ... also controls the maintenance menu logon time out For more information on the functions Authority Management AUTHMAN Authority Status ATHSTAT and Authority Check ATHCHCK functions refer to chapter Basic IED functions in the Technical Manual 20 2 Authority management AUTHMAN 20 2 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number A...

Page 712: ...LS encryption gives the FTP client reduced capabilities This mode is only for accessing disturbance recorder data from the IED If normal FTP is required to read out disturbance recordings create a specific account for this purpose with rights only to do File transfer The password of this user will be exposed in clear text on the wire 20 3 3 Settings Table 586 FTPACCS Non group settings basic Name ...

Page 713: ... vsd ATHSTAT USRBLKED LOGGEDON IEC06000503 V2 EN Figure 268 ATHSTAT function block 20 4 4 Signals Table 587 ATHSTAT Output signals Name Type Description USRBLKED BOOLEAN At least one user is blocked by invalid password LOGGEDON BOOLEAN At least one user is logged on The output signal USRBLKED is not valid if the IED is Centralized Account Management enabled 20 4 5 Settings The function does not ha...

Page 714: ...ock for LON SPA The signals are also available on IEC 61850 station bus 20 5 Self supervision with internal event list INTERRSIG 20 5 1 Functionality Self supervision with internal event list function listens and reacts to internal system events generated by the different built in self supervision elements The internal events are saved in an internal event list presented on the LHMI and in PCM600 ...

Page 715: ...function Checking of digitized measuring signals Other alarms for example hardware and time synchronization The self supervision function status can be monitored from the local HMI or from the Event Viewer in PCM600 Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI the actual information from the self supervision function can be reviewed The information can be found under Main menu Diagnostics Internal ...

Page 716: ...en one or more error conditions are present in the IED for example harware error Some output signals are available from the INTERRSIG function block The signals from this function block are sent as events via IEC61850 to the station level of the control system These signals can also be connected to binary outputs for signalization via output relays or they can be used as conditions for other funct...

Page 717: ...ESYNCHERROR RTCERROR Real Time Clock status Real time clock This signal will be active when there is a hardware error with the real time clock TIMESYNCHERROR Time Synchroniz ation status Time synch This signal will be active when the source of the time synchronization is lost or when the time system has to make a time reset RTEERROR Runtime Execution Error status Runtime execution This signal will...

Page 718: ... Power Supply Module Error status PSM1 Activated if the module has a hardware error BIM BIM Error Binary In Module Error status BIMn Activated if the module has a hardware error n slot number BOM BOM Error Binary Out Module Error status BOMn Activated if the module has a hardware error n slot number IOM IOM Error In Out Module Error status IOMn Activated if the module has a hardware error n slot n...

Page 719: ...tatus TRM41 20 5 5 2 Supervision of analog inputs The analog signals to the A D converter is internally distributed into two different converters one with low amplification and one with high amplification When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels a direct comparison of the two A D converter channels can be performed If the validation fails the CPU will be informed and an alarm w...

Page 720: ...ble time synchronization sources for synchrophasor measurement applications and RES670 supports both Micro SCADA OPC server should not be used as a time synchronization source 20 6 2 Settings There are two groups of parameter settings related to time System time Synchronization The System time group relates to setting the on off and start end of the Daylight Saving Time DST for the local time zone...

Page 721: ...AppSynch NoSynch Synch NoSynch Time synchronization mode for application SyncAccLevel Class T5 1us Class T4 4us Unspecified Unspecified Wanted time synchronization accuracy Table 593 DSTENABLE Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description DST Enable Disabled Enabled Enabled Enables or disables the use of Daylight Saving Time 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 20 Basic IED functi...

Page 722: ...ime starts DayInWeek Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Day in week when daylight time starts WeekInMonth Last First Second Third Fourth Last Week in month when daylight time starts UTCTimeOfDay 24 00 23 30 00 30 00 00 00 30 48 00 1 00 UTC Time of day in hours when daylight time starts Section 20 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Basic IED functions 716 Phasor measurement unit RES670...

Page 723: ...ht time ends DayInWeek Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Day in week when daylight time ends WeekInMonth Last First Second Third Fourth Last Week in month when daylight time ends UTCTimeOfDay 24 00 23 30 00 30 00 00 00 30 48 00 1 00 UTC Time of day in hours when daylight time ends 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 20 Basic IED functions Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANS...

Page 724: ... 11 00 11 30 12 00 12 45 13 00 14 00 1 00 Local time from UTC Table 597 IRIG B Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description SynchType BNC Opto Opto Type of synchronization TimeDomain LocalTime UTC LocalTime Time domain Encoding IRIG B 1344 1344TZ IRIG B Type of encoding TimeZoneAs1344 MinusTZ PlusTZ PlusTZ Time zone as in 1344 standard Section 20 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Basi...

Page 725: ...e figure 272 SW time Time Regulator Time tagging and general synchronisation Time Regulator Setting see technical reference manual Comm unication Events Synchronization for differential protection ECHO mode or GPS Diff comm unication IEC 61850 9 2 IEC140000113 1 en vsd External Synchronization sources Trans ducers GPS IRIG B Off Protection and control functions A D converter HW time IEC140000113 V...

Page 726: ...e source with the best quality and to adjust its internal clock based on this source The maximum error of a clock can be defined as The maximum error of the last used synchronization message The time since the last used synchronization message The rate accuracy of the internal clock in the function 20 6 3 2 Real time clock RTC operation The IED has a built in real time clock RTC with a resolution ...

Page 727: ...the following message also has a large offset the spike filter does not act and the offset in the synchronization message is compared to a threshold that defaults to 5 milliseconds If the offset is more than the threshold 5ms the IED is brought into a safe state and the clock is set to the correct time If the offset is lower than the threshold 5ms the clock is adjusted with 1000ppm until the offse...

Page 728: ...ed and the information transmitted To receive IRIG B there are two connectors in the IRIG B module one galvanic BNC connector and one optical ST connector IRIG B 12x messages can be supplied via the galvanic interface and IRIG B 00x messages can be supplied via either the galvanic interface or the optical interface where x in 00x or 12x means a number in the range of 0 7 00 means that a base band ...

Page 729: ...time source as the IED To achieve this a satellite controlled clock shall provide time synchronization to the IED either internal GPS or via IRIG B 00x with IEEE1344 support and to the merging units via for instance PPS For the time synchronization of the process bus communication GPS Time Module GTM and or IRIG B module can be used If the IED contains a GTM the merging unit can be synchronized fr...

Page 730: ... BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 4 as active ACTGRP5 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 5 as active ACTGRP6 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 6 as active Table 600 ACTVGRP Output signals Name Type Description GRP1 BOOLEAN Setting group 1 is active GRP2 BOOLEAN Setting group 2 is active GRP3 BOOLEAN Setting group 3 is active GRP4 BOOLEAN Setting group 4 is active GRP5 BOOLEAN Setting group 5 is active G...

Page 731: ... be used The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group when adaptive functionality is necessary Input signals that should activate setting groups must be either permanent or a pulse exceeding 400 ms More than one input may be activated at the same time In such cases the lower order setting group has priority This means that if for example both group four and group t...

Page 732: ... GRP3 GRP4 ActiveGroup ACTGRP5 ACTGRP6 GRP5 GRP6 IOx Bly5 IOx Bly6 Æ Æ ACTIVATE GROUP 5 ACTIVATE GROUP 6 GRP_CHGD ANSI05000119 V2 EN Figure 275 Connection of the function to external circuits The above example also includes seven output signals for confirmation of which group that is active 20 8 ChangeLock function CHNGLCK 20 8 1 Functionality Change lock function CHNGLCK is used to block further ...

Page 733: ...RIDE BOOLEAN Change lock override 20 8 4 Operation principle The Change lock function CHNGLCK is configured using ACT The function when activated will still allow the following changes of the IED state that does not involve reconfiguring of the IED Monitoring Reading events Resetting events Reading disturbance data Clear disturbances Reset LEDs Reset counters and other runtime component states Con...

Page 734: ...nctions that have their block input active and the IED resumes normal operation However if during TESTMODE operation power is removed and later restored the IED will remain in TESTMODE with the same protection functions blocked or unblocked as before the power was removed All testing will be done with actually set and configured values within the IED No settings will be changed thus mistakes are a...

Page 735: ...Settings Table 606 TESTMODE Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description IEDTestMode Disabled Enabled Disabled Activate IED Test mode EventDisable Disabled Enabled Disabled Event disable during test mode BlockAllFunc Disabled Enabled Enabled Block all functions when entering IED test mode CmdTestEd1 Disabled Enabled Disabled Require test bit in command at test mode only...

Page 736: ... input all functions will be temporarily unblocked during startup which might cause unwanted operations The TESTMODE function block might be used to automatically block functions when a test handle is inserted in a test switch A contact in the test switch RTXP24 contact 29 30 or an FT switch finger can supply a binary input which in turn is configured to the TESTMODE function block Each of the fun...

Page 737: ...y part 2 0 16 1 Technical key part 3 0 16 1 Technical key part 4 20 11 Product information 20 11 1 Functionality The Product identifiers function contains constant data i e not possible to change that uniquely identifies the IED ProductVer ProductDef FirmwareVer SerialNo OrderingNo ProductionDate IEDProdType The settings are visible on the local HMI under Main menu Diagnostics IED status Product i...

Page 738: ... The firmware version can be checked from Main menu Diagnostics IED status Product identifiers Firmware version numbers run independently from the release production numbers For every release number there can be one or more firmware versions depending on the small issues corrected in between releases ProductVer Describes the product version Example 2 1 0 1 is the Major version of the manufactured ...

Page 739: ...7 VIN8 VIN9 VIN10 BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 IEC05000434 V2 EN Figure 278 SMBI function block 20 12 3 Signals Table 608 SMBI Input signals Name Type Default Description BI1 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input BI2 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input BI3 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input BI4 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input BI5 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input BI6 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input BI7 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect...

Page 740: ...via its outputs BI1 to BI10 The inputs and outputs as well as the whole block can be given a user defined name These names will be represented in SMT as information which signals shall be connected between physical IO and SMBI function The input output user defined name will also appear on the respective output input signal 20 13 Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO 20 13 1 Functionality The Sign...

Page 741: ...N 0 Signal name for BO7 in Signal Matrix Tool BO8 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO8 in Signal Matrix Tool BO9 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO9 in Signal Matrix Tool BO10 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO10 in Signal Matrix Tool 20 13 4 Operation principle The Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO function see figure 279 receives logical signal from the IED configuration which is transferring to the real hardw...

Page 742: ...I3 AI4 AI5 AI6 AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 AI6 IEC05000440 vsd IEC05000440 V3 EN Figure 280 SMMI function block 20 14 3 Signals Table 611 SMMI Input signals Name Type Default Description AI1 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input AI2 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input AI3 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input AI4 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input AI5 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input AI6 RE...

Page 743: ... known as the preprocessor function block analyses the connected four analog signals three phases and neutral and calculates all relevant information from them like the phasor magnitude phase angle frequency true RMS value harmonics sequence components and so on This information is then used by the respective functions connected to this SMAI block in ACT for example protection measurement or monit...

Page 744: ...ion BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 1 DFTSPFC REAL 20 0 Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for DFT calculation REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation group 1 GRP1_A STRING First analog input used for phase A or AB quantity GRP1_B STRING Second analog input used for phase B or BC quantity GRP1_C STRING Third analog input used for phase C or CA quantity GRP1_N STRING Fourth analog input used for re...

Page 745: ...TRING Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral quantity Table 616 SMAI2 Output signals Name Type Description G2AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 3 phase group G2AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 1 G2AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 2 G2AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 3 G2AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 4 G2N GROUP SIGNAL Group parameter for residual sample 20 15 4...

Page 746: ...1 DFTRefGrp2 DFTRefGrp3 DFTRefGrp4 DFTRefGrp5 DFTRefGrp6 DFTRefGrp7 DFTRefGrp8 DFTRefGrp9 DFTRefGrp10 DFTRefGrp11 DFTRefGrp12 External DFT ref InternalDFTRef DFT reference ConnectionType Ph N Ph Ph Ph N Input connection type AnalogInputType Voltage Current Voltage Analog input signal type Table 618 SMAI1 Non group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Negation Disabled ...

Page 747: ...y Signal matrix for analog inputs function SMAI can receive four analog signals three phases and one neutral or residual value either voltage or current see figure 281 and figure 282 SMAI outputs give information about every aspect of the 3ph analog signals acquired phase angle RMS value frequency and frequency derivates etc 244 values in total The BLOCK input will force all outputs to value zero ...

Page 748: ...ve sequence voltage Note that phase to phase inputs shall always be connected as follows A B to GRPxA B C to GRPxB C A to GRPxC If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph N all three inputs GRPx_A GRPx_B and GRPx_C must be connected in order to calculate the positive sequence voltage If only one phase phase voltage is available and SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph Ph the user is advised to connect two ...

Page 749: ...ase 3PHSUM 20 16 1 Functionality Summation block 3 phase function 3PHSUM is used to get the sum of two sets of three phase analog signals of the same type for those IED functions that might need it 20 16 2 Function block 3PHSUM BLOCK REVROT G1AI3P G2AI3P AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 IEC05000441 3 en vsdx IEC05000441 V3 EN Figure 284 3PHSUM function block 20 16 3 Signals Table 621 3PHSUM Input signals Name...

Page 750: ... of input 3 signals from both SMAI blocks AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 4 signals from both SMAI blocks 20 16 4 Settings Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available Table 623 3PHSUM Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description GlobalBaseSel 1 12 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base V...

Page 751: ...base values GBASVAL 20 17 2 Functionality Global base values function GBASVAL is used to provide global values common for all applicable functions within the IED One set of global values consists of values for current voltage and apparent power and it is possible to have twelve different sets This is an advantage since all applicable functions in the IED use a single source of base values This fac...

Page 752: ...Values in the local HMI and PCM600 parameter setting tree 20 18 3 Settings Table 626 PRIMVAL Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Frequency 50 0 60 0 Hz 10 0 50 0 Rated system frequency PhaseRotation Normal ABC Inverse ACB Normal ABC System phase rotation 20 19 Denial of service DOS 20 19 1 Functionality The Denial of service functions DOSFRNT DOSLANAB and DOSLA...

Page 753: ...00309 1 en vsd IEC13000309 V1 EN Figure 287 DOSLANCD function block 20 19 3 Signals Table 627 DOSFRNT Output signals Name Type Description LINKUP BOOLEAN Ethernet link status WARNING BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than normal state ALARM BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than throttle state Table 628 DOSLANAB Output signals Name Type Description LINKUP BOOLEAN Ethernet link status WARNING BOOLEAN Frame r...

Page 754: ...4 DiscardAll 5 StopPoll Frame rate control state Quota INTEGER Quota level in percent 0 100 Table 631 DOSLANAB Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description DoSStatus INTEGER 0 Off 1 Normal 2 Throttle 3 DiscardLow 4 DiscardAll 5 StopPoll Frame rate control state Quota INTEGER Quota level in percent 0 100 Table 632 DOSLANCD Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description DoSStatus I...

Page 755: ... the IEDs control and protection functionality due to high CPU load The function has the following outputs LINKUP indicates the Ethernet link status WARNING indicates that communication frame rate is higher than normal ALARM indicates that the IED limits communication 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 20 Basic IED functions Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 749 Technical manual ...

Page 756: ...750 ...

Page 757: ...1 1 1 Variants of case size with local HMI display ANSI04000458 2 en psd ANSI04000458 V2 EN Figure 288 1 2 19 case with local HMI display 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 21 IED hardware Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 751 Technical manual ...

Page 758: ...EN Figure 289 3 4 19 case with local HMI display ANSI04000460 2 en psd ANSI04000460 V2 EN Figure 290 1 1 19 case with local HMI display Section 21 1MRK 511 365 UUS A IED hardware 752 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 759: ...2801 AC 2 670 1 2 PG V3 EN Module Rear Positions PSM X11 BIM BOM SOM IOM or MIM X31 and X32 etc to X51 and X52 SLM X301 A B C D LDCM IRIG B or RS485 X302 LDCM or RS485 X303 OEM X311 A B C D LDCM IRIG B or GTM X312 X313 TRM X401 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 21 IED hardware Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 753 Technical manual ...

Page 760: ...2 PG V3 EN Module Rear Positions PSM X11 BIM BOM SOM IOM or MIM X31 and X32 etc to X101 and X102 SLM X301 A B C D LDCM IRIG B or RS485 X302 LDCM or RS485 X303 OEM X311 A B C D LDCM RS485 or GTM X312 X313 TRM X401 Section 21 1MRK 511 365 UUS A IED hardware 754 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 761: ... Module Rear Positions PSM X11 BIM BOM SOM IOM or MIM X31 and X32 etc to X71 and X72 SLM X301 A B C D LDCM IRIG B or RS485 X302 LDCM or RS485 X303 OEM X311 A B C D LDCM RS485 or GTM X312 X313 X322 X323 TRM 1 X401 TRM 2 X411 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 21 IED hardware Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 755 Technical manual ...

Page 762: ...2 PG V3 EN Module Rear Positions PSM X11 BIM BOM SOM IOM or MIM X31 and X32 etc to X161 and X162 SLM X301 A B C D LDCM IRIG B or RS485 X302 LDCM or RS485 X303 OEM X311 A B C D LDCM RS485 or GTM X312 X313 TRM X401 Section 21 1MRK 511 365 UUS A IED hardware 756 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 763: ...s PSM X11 BIM BOM SOM IOM or MIM X31 and X32 etc to X131 and X132 SLM X301 A B C D LDCM IRIG B or RS485 X302 LDCM or RS485 X303 OEM X311 A B C D LDCM RS485 or GTM X312 X313 X322 X323 TRM 1 X401 TRM 2 X411 SLM and LDCM modules not used in RES670 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 21 IED hardware Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 757 Technical manual ...

Page 764: ...le BIM Module with 16 optically isolated binary inputs Binary output module BOM Module with 24 single outputs or 12 double pole command outputs including supervision function Binary I O module IOM Module with 8 optically isolated binary inputs 10 outputs and 2 fast signalling outputs Serial SPA LON IEC 60870 5 103 communication modules SLM Used for SPA LON IEC 60870 5 103 communication Optical eth...

Page 765: ...act PCI connectors and an euro connector The NUM has one PMC slot 32 bit IEEE P1386 1 compliant and two PC MIP slots onto which mezzanine cards such as SLM or LDCM can be mounted To reduce bus loading of the compact PCI bus in the backplane the NUM has one internal PCI bus for internal resources and the PMC PC MIP slots and external PCI accesses through the backplane are buffered in a PCI PCI brid...

Page 766: ...Figure 291 Numeric processing module block diagram 21 2 3 Power supply module PSM 21 2 3 1 Introduction The power supply module is used to provide the correct internal voltages and full isolation between the IED and the battery system An internal fail alarm output is available Section 21 1MRK 511 365 UUS A IED hardware 760 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 767: ...alue Nominal range Auxiliary dc voltage EL input EL 24 60 V EL 90 250 V EL 20 EL 20 Power consumption 50 W typically Auxiliary DC power in rush 10 A during 0 1 s 21 2 4 Local human machine interface Local HMI Refer to section for information 21 2 5 Transformer input module TRM 21 2 5 1 Introduction The transformer input module is used to galvanically separate and adapt the secondary currents and v...

Page 768: ...channels 12 current channels The rated values and channel type measurement or protection of the current inputs are selected at order Transformer input module for measuring should not be used with current transformers intended for protection purposes due to limitations in overload characteristics The TRM is connected to the ADM and NUM For configuration of the input and output signals refer to sect...

Page 769: ...lue Nominal range Current In 1 or 5 A 0 2 40 In Operative range 0 100 x In Permissive overload 4 In cont 100 In for 1 s Burden 150 mVA at In 5 A 20 mVA at In 1 A Ac voltage Vn 120 V 0 5 288 V Operative range 0 340 V Permissive overload 420 V cont 450 V 10 s Table continues on next page 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 21 IED hardware Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 763 Technical manual ...

Page 770: ...V 0 5 288 V Operative range 0 340 V Permissive overload 420 V cont 450 V 10 s Burden 20 mVA at 110 V Frequency fn 60 50 Hz 5 21 2 6 Analog digital conversion module with time synchronization ADM 21 2 6 1 Introduction The Analog Digital module has twelve analog inputs 2 PC MIP slots and 1 PMC slot The PC MIP slot is used for PC MIP cards and the PMC slot for PMC cards according to table 643 The OEM...

Page 771: ...rent In this way a 20 bit dynamic range is obtained with a 16 bit A D converter Input signals are sampled with a sampling freqency of 5 kHz at 50 Hz system frequency and 6 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency The A D converted signals goes through a filter with a cut off frequency of 500 Hz and are reported to the numerical module NUM with 1 kHz at 50 Hz system frequency and 1 2 kHz at 60 Hz system frequ...

Page 772: ...Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 9 Channel 10 Channel 11 Channel 12 1 2v 2 5v level shift en05000474 vsd IEC05000474 V1 EN Figure 294 The ADM layout Section 21 1MRK 511 365 UUS A IED hardware 766 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 773: ...nput signals refer to section Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI A signal discriminator detects and blocks oscillating signals When blocked a hysteresis function may be set to release the input at a chosen frequency making it possible to use the input for pulse counting The blocking frequency may also be set Well defined input high and input low voltages ensure normal operation at battery supply...

Page 774: ...ation uncertain No operation This binary input module communicates with the Numerical module NUM The design of all binary inputs enables the burn off of the oxide of the relay contact connected to the input despite the low steady state power consumption which is shown in figure 296 and 297 Section 21 1MRK 511 365 UUS A IED hardware 768 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 775: ...t for the standard version of BIM en07000105 1 vsd 50 5 5 ms mA IEC07000105 V2 EN Figure 297 Approximate binary input inrush current for the BIM version with enhanced pulse counting capabilities 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 21 IED hardware Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 769 Technical manual ...

Page 776: ... signals Name Type Description STATUS BOOLEAN Binary input module status BI1 BOOLEAN Binary input 1 BI2 BOOLEAN Binary input 2 BI3 BOOLEAN Binary input 3 Table continues on next page Section 21 1MRK 511 365 UUS A IED hardware 770 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 777: ...6 21 2 7 4 Settings Table 645 BIM Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Enabled Operation Disabled Enabled DebounceTime 0 001 0 020 s 0 001 0 001 Debounce time for binary inputs OscBlock 1 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit OscRelease 1 30 Hz 1 30 Oscillation release limit 21 2 7 5 Monitored data Table 646 BIM Monitored data Name Type V...

Page 778: ...ary input channels may be activated simultaneously with influencing factors within nominal range Table 648 BIM Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities Quantity Rated value Nominal range Binary inputs 16 DC voltage RL 24 30 V 48 60 V 125 V 220 250 V RL 20 RL 20 RL 20 RL 20 Power consumption 24 30 V 48 60 V 125 V 220 250 V max 0 05 W input max 0 1 W input max 0 2 W input max 0 ...

Page 779: ... connection terminal on the back of the IED The high closing and carrying current capability allows connection directly to breaker trip and closing coils If breaking capability is required to manage fail of the breaker auxiliary contacts normally breaking the trip coil current a parallel reinforcement is required For configuration of the output signals refer to section Signal matrix for binary out...

Page 780: ... output 1 BO2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 2 BO3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 3 BO4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 4 BO5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 5 BO6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 6 BO7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 7 BO8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 8 BO9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 9 Table continues on next page Section 21 1MRK 511 365 UUS A IED hardware 774 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 781: ...N 0 Binary output 24 Table 650 BOM Output signals Name Type Description STATUS BOOLEAN Binary output part of IOM module status 21 2 8 4 Settings Table 651 BOM Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Enabled Operation Disabled Enabled 21 2 8 5 Monitored data Table 652 BOM Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description STATUS BOOLEA...

Page 782: ...BO4 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 4 status BO5VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 5 value BO5FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 5 force BO5 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 5 status BO6VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 6 value BO6FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 6 force BO6 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 6 status BO7...

Page 783: ...LEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 11 force BO11 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 11 status BO12VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 12 value BO12FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 12 force BO12 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 12 status BO13VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 13 value BO13FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 13 force BO13 BOO...

Page 784: ... BO18VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 18 value BO18FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 18 force BO18 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 18 status BO19VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 19 value BO19FORCE BOOLEAN 1 Forced 0 Normal Binary output 19 force BO19 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 19 status BO20VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 20 value BO20...

Page 785: ...4 force BO24 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 24 status 21 2 8 6 Technical data Table 653 BOM Binary output module contact data reference standard IEC 61810 2 Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays Binary outputs 24 Max system voltage 250 V AC DC Test voltage across open contact 1 min 1000 V rms Current carrying capacity Per relay continuous Per relay 1 s Per process connecto...

Page 786: ...21 2 9 1 Introduction The static binary output module has six fast static outputs and six change over output relays for use in applications with high speed requirements 21 2 9 2 Design The Static output module SOM have 6 normally open NO static outputs and 6 electromechanical relay outputs with change over contacts The SOM consists mainly of An MCU A CAN driver 6 static relays outputs 6 electromec...

Page 787: ...N 0 Binary output 1 BO2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 2 BO3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 3 BO4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 4 BO5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 5 BO6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 6 BO7 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 7 BO8 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 8 BO9 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 9 BO10 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 10 BO11 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 11 BO12 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 12 1M...

Page 788: ...BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 1 force BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 1 status BO2VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 2 value BO2FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 2 force BO2 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 2 status BO3VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 3 value BO3FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 3 force BO3 BOOLEAN 0 Norm...

Page 789: ...BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 7 status BO8VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 8 value BO8FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 8 force BO8 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 8 status BO9VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 9 value BO9FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 9 force BO9 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 9 status BO10VAL...

Page 790: ... Static binary outputs Function of quantity Static binary output trip Rated voltage 48 60 VDC 110 250 VDC Number of outputs 6 6 Impedance open state 300 kΩ 810 kΩ Test voltage across open contact 1 min No galvanic separation No galvanic separation Current carrying capacity Continuous 5A 5A 1 0s 10A 10A Making capacity at capacitive load with the maximum capacitance of 0 2 μF 0 2s 30A 30A 1 0s 10A ...

Page 791: ...the 96 outputs must not exceed 200 ms 48 outputs can be activated during 1 s Continued activation is possible with respect to current consumption but after 5 minutes the temperature rise will adversely affect the hardware life Maximum two relays per BOM IOM SOM should be activated continuously due to power dissipation 21 2 10 Binary input output module IOM 21 2 10 1 Introduction The binary input o...

Page 792: ...rmal operation at battery supply ground faults see figure 295 The voltage level of the inputs is selected when ordering I O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance and stored by the event recorder if present The binary input output module version with MOV protected contacts can for example be used in applications where breaking high inductive load would cause exces...

Page 793: ...OUT Input signals Name Type Default Description BLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Block binary outputs BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 1 BO2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 2 BO3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 3 BO4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 4 BO5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 5 BO6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 6 BO7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 7 BO8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 8 BO9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 9 BO10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 10 BO11 BOOLEAN...

Page 794: ...MOUT Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description BO1VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 1 value BO1FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 1 force BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 1 status BO2VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 2 value BO2FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 2 force BO2 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 2 status BO3VAL...

Page 795: ... BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 7 force BO7 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 7 status BO8VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 8 value BO8FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 8 force BO8 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 8 status BO9VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 9 value BO9FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 9 force BO9 BOOLEAN 0 Nor...

Page 796: ...relay Binary outputs IOM 10 IOM 2 Max system voltage 250 V AC DC 250 V DC Test voltage across open contact 1 min 250 V rms 250 V rms Current carrying capacity Per relay continuous Per relay 1 s Per process connector pin continuous 8 A 10 A 12 A 8 A 10 A 12 A Making capacity at inductive loadwith L R 10 ms 0 2 s 1 0 s 30 A 10 A 0 4 A 0 4 A Making capacity at resistive load 0 2 s 1 0 s 30 A 10 A 220...

Page 797: ... independent galvanically separated channels 21 2 11 2 Design The Milliampere Input Module has six independent analog channels with separated protection filtering reference A D conversion and optical isolation for each input making them galvanically isolated from each other and from the rest of the module For configuration of the input signals refer to section Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI The ...

Page 798: ...IEC99000504 V2 EN Figure 304 MIM connection diagram Section 21 1MRK 511 365 UUS A IED hardware 792 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 799: ... for Channel 1 ValueMinCh1 10000000000 000 10000000000 000 0 001 4 000 Min primary value corr to IMinCh1 ValueMaxCh1 10000000000 000 10000000000 000 0 001 20 000 Max primary value corr to IMaxCh1 EnDeadBandCh2 Disabled Enabled Disabled Enable amplitude deadband reporting for channel 2 DeadBandCh2 0 00 20 00 mA 0 01 1 00 Deadband amplitude for channel 2 IMinCh2 25 00 25 00 mA 0 01 4 00 Min current ...

Page 800: ...BandCh5 Disabled Enabled Disabled Enable amplitude deadband reporting for channel 5 DeadBandCh5 0 00 20 00 mA 0 01 1 00 Deadband amplitude for channel 5 IMinCh5 25 00 25 00 mA 0 01 4 00 Min current of transducer for Channel 5 IMaxCh5 25 00 25 00 mA 0 01 20 00 Max current of transducer for Channel 5 ValueMinCh5 10000000000 000 10000000000 000 0 001 4 000 Min primary value corr to IMinCh5 ValueMaxCh...

Page 801: ...ble 669 MIM mA input module Quantity Rated value Nominal range Input resistance Rin 194 Ohm Input range 5 10 20mA 0 5 0 10 0 20 4 20mA Power consumption each mA board each mA input 2 W 0 1 W 21 2 12 Galvanic RS485 communication module 21 2 12 1 Introduction The Galvanic RS485 communication module RS485 is used for DNP3 0 and IEC 60870 5 103 communication The module has one RS485 communication port...

Page 802: ...he arrangement for the pins Pin Name 2 wire Name 4 wire Description 1 RS485 TX Receive transmit high or transmit high 2 RS485 TX Receive transmit 3 Term T Term Termination resistor for transmitter and receiver in 2 wir case connect to TX 4 N A R Term Termination resistor for receiver connect to RX 5 N A RX Receive low 6 N A RX Receive high Screw terminal X3 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 Screw terminal X1 Backpl...

Page 803: ...connector 21 2 13 Optical ethernet module OEM 21 2 13 1 Introduction The optical fast ethernet module is used for fast and interference free communication of synchrophasor data over IEEE C37 118 and or IEEE 1344 protocols It is also used to connect an IED to the communication buses like the station bus that use the IEC 61850 8 1 protocol OEM rear port A B The process bus use the IEC 61850 9 2LE pr...

Page 804: ...Receiver 21 2 13 4 Technical data Table 672 OEM Optical ethernet module Quantity Rated value Number of channels 1 or 2 port A B for IEC 61850 8 1 IEEE C37 118 and port C D for IEC 61850 9 2LE IEEE C37 118 1 or 2 port A B for IEC 61850 8 1 IEEE C37 118 Standard IEEE 802 3u 100BASE FX Type of fiber 62 5 125 mm multimode fibre Wave length 1300 nm Optical connector Type ST Communication speed Fast Eth...

Page 805: ...itter for PPS output is available for time synchronization of another relay with an optical PPS input The PPS output connector is of ST type for multimode fibre and could be used up to 1 km 21 2 14 3 Monitored data Table 673 SYNCHGPS Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description NoOfSatellites INTEGER Number of GPS signals from satellites 21 2 14 4 Technical data Table 674 GPS time synchr...

Page 806: ...ontal or vertical flat surface or on an antenna mast See figure 307 xx04000155 vsd 1 2 4 3 5 6 7 IEC04000155 V2 EN Figure 307 Antenna with console where 1 GPS antenna 2 TNC connector 3 Console 2 6 7 x4 11 4 Mounting holes about 1 5 5 Tab for securing of antenna cable 6 Vertical mounting position 7 Horizontal mounting position Section 21 1MRK 511 365 UUS A IED hardware 800 Phasor measurement unit R...

Page 807: ...antenna cable attenuation 26 db 1 6 GHz Antenna cable impedance 50 ohm Lightning protection Must be provided externally Antenna cable connector SMA in receiver end TNC in antenna end Accuracy 1μs 21 2 16 IRIG B time synchronization module IRIG B 21 2 16 1 Introduction The IRIG B time synchronizing module is used for accurate time synchronizing of the IED from a station clock Electrical BNC and opt...

Page 808: ... Description SynchType BNC Opto Opto Type of synchronization TimeDomain LocalTime UTC LocalTime Time domain Encoding IRIG B 1344 1344TZ IRIG B Type of encoding TimeZoneAs1344 MinusTZ PlusTZ PlusTZ Time zone as in 1344 standard 21 2 16 4 Technical data Table 677 IRIG B Quantity Rated value Number of channels IRIG B 1 Number of optical channels 1 Electrical connector Electrical connector IRIG B BNC ...

Page 809: ... IRIG B 00x IRIG B 12x Accuracy 10μs for IRIG B 00x and 100μs for IRIG B 12x Input impedance 100 k ohm Optical connector Optical connector IRIG B Type ST Type of fibre 62 5 125 μm multimode fibre Supported formats IRIG B 00x Accuracy 1μs 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 21 IED hardware Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 803 Technical manual ...

Page 810: ...21 3 1 Case without rear cover C B D E A IEC08000164 2 en vsd IEC08000164 V2 EN Figure 309 Case without rear cover Section 21 1MRK 511 365 UUS A IED hardware 804 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 811: ...10 47 8 81 7 92 9 96 8 10 7 50 8 02 18 31 7 39 19 00 6U 3 4 x 19 10 47 13 23 7 92 9 96 12 52 7 50 12 44 18 31 7 39 19 00 6U 1 1 x 19 10 47 17 65 7 92 9 96 16 94 7 50 16 86 18 31 7 39 19 00 The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19 rack mounting kit 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 21 IED hardware Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 805 Technical manual ...

Page 812: ...2 Case with rear cover C B D E A IEC08000163 2 en vsd IEC08000163 V2 EN Figure 311 Case with rear cover Section 21 1MRK 511 365 UUS A IED hardware 806 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 813: ...EN Figure 312 Case with rear cover and 19 rack mounting kit IEC05000503 2 en vsd IEC05000503 V2 EN Figure 313 Rear cover case with details 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 21 IED hardware Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 807 Technical manual ...

Page 814: ... 31 9 00 19 00 6U 1 1 x 19 10 47 17 65 9 53 10 07 16 86 7 50 16 86 18 31 9 00 19 00 The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19 rack mounting kit 21 3 3 Flush mounting dimensions C A B E D IEC08000162 2 en vsd IEC08000162 V2 EN Figure 314 Flush mounting Section 21 1MRK 511 365 UUS A IED hardware 808 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 815: ... 1 x 19 17 11 10 01 0 16 0 39 0 49 E 7 42 without rear protection cover 9 03 with rear protection cover 21 3 4 Side by side flush mounting dimensions IEC06000182 2 en vsd IEC06000182 V2 EN Figure 315 A 1 2 x 19 size IED side by side with RHGS6 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 21 IED hardware Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 809 Technical manual ...

Page 816: ...hes Tolerance A 0 04 B 0 04 C 0 04 D 0 04 E 0 04 F 0 04 G 0 04 6U 1 2 x 19 8 42 10 21 9 46 7 50 1 35 0 52 0 25 diam 6U 3 4 x 19 12 85 10 21 13 89 7 50 1 35 0 52 0 25 diam 6U 1 1 x 19 17 27 10 21 18 31 7 50 1 35 0 52 0 25 diam Section 21 1MRK 511 365 UUS A IED hardware 810 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 817: ... 36 9 57 6U 3 4 x 19 15 92 14 94 10 74 15 36 9 57 6U 1 1 x 19 20 31 19 33 10 74 15 36 9 57 21 4 Mounting alternatives 21 4 1 Flush mounting 21 4 1 1 Overview The flush mounting kit can be used for case sizes 1 2 x 19 3 4 x 19 1 1 x 19 1 4 x 19 RHGS6 6U 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 21 IED hardware Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 811 Technical manual ...

Page 818: ...n be obtained when mounting two cases side by side in one 1 cut out To obtain IP54 class protection an additional factory mounted sealing must be ordered when ordering the IED 21 4 1 2 Mounting procedure for flush mounting 1 3 5 4 2 6 IEC08000161 2 en vsd IEC08000161 V2 EN Figure 318 Flush mounting details Section 21 1MRK 511 365 UUS A IED hardware 812 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Techn...

Page 819: ... two mounting angles and their fastening screws The mounting angles are reversible which enables mounting of IED size 1 2 x 19 or 3 4 x 19 either to the left or the right side of the cubicle A separately ordered rack mounting kit for side by side mounted IEDs or IEDs together with RHGS cases should be selected so that the total size equals 19 When mounting the mounting angles use screws that follo...

Page 820: ...00160 V2 EN Figure 319 19 panel rack mounting details PosNo Description Quantity Type 1a 1b Mounting angles can be mounted either to the left or the right side of the case 2 2 Screw 8 M4x6 Section 21 1MRK 511 365 UUS A IED hardware 814 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 821: ...e plates use screws that follow the recommended dimensions Using screws with other dimensions may damage the PCBs inside the IED If fiber cables are bent too much the signal can be weakened Wall mounting is therefore not recommended for any communication modules with fiber connection 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 21 IED hardware Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 815 Technical manual ...

Page 822: ...ing 4 2 Screw 8 M4x10 3 Screw 4 M6x12 or corresponding 4 Mounting bar 2 5 Screw 6 M5x8 6 Side plate 2 21 4 3 3 How to reach the rear side of the IED The IED can be equipped with a rear protection cover recommended to be used with this type of mounting See figure 321 Section 21 1MRK 511 365 UUS A IED hardware 816 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 823: ... 21 4 4 1 Overview IED case size 1 2 x 19 or 3 4 x 19 and RHGS cases can be mounted side by side up to a maximum size of 19 For side by side rack mounting the side by side mounting kit together with the 19 rack panel mounting kit must be used The mounting kit has to be ordered separately When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED use screws that follow the recommended dimensions Using scre...

Page 824: ...ng angle 2 21 4 4 3 IED mounted with a RHGS6 case A 1 2 x 19 or 3 4 x 19 size IED can be mounted with a RHGS case 6 or 12 depending on IED size The RHGS case can be used for mounting a test switch of type RTXP 24 It also has enough space for a terminal base of RX 2 type for mounting of for example a DC switch or two trip IEDs Section 21 1MRK 511 365 UUS A IED hardware 818 Phasor measurement unit R...

Page 825: ...tails kit and the 19 panel rack mounting kit must be used The mounting kit has to be ordered separately The maximum size of the panel cut out is 19 With side by side flush mounting installation only IP class 20 is obtained To reach IP class 54 it is recommended to mount the IEDs separately For cut out dimensions of separately mounted IEDs see section Flush mounting When mounting the plates and the...

Page 826: ... side flush mounting details RHGS6 side by side with 1 2 x 19 IED PosNo Description Quantity Type 1 Mounting plate 2 2 3 Screw 16 M4x6 4 Mounting angle 2 21 5 Technical data 21 5 1 Enclosure Table 678 Case Material Steel sheet Front plate Steel sheet profile with cut out for HMI Surface treatment Aluzink preplated steel Finish Light grey RAL 7035 Section 21 1MRK 511 365 UUS A IED hardware 820 Phas...

Page 827: ...occasionally a temporary conductivity caused by condensation is to be expected 21 5 3 Connection system Table 682 CT and VT circuit connectors Connector type Rated voltage and current Maximum conductor area Screw compression type 250 V AC 20 A 4 mm2 AWG12 2 x 2 5 mm2 2 x AWG14 Terminal blocks suitable for ring lug terminals 250 V AC 20 A 4 mm2 AWG12 Table 683 Auxiliary power supply and binary I O ...

Page 828: ... operation Dependence on Reference value Within nominal range Influence Ripple in DC auxiliary voltage Operative range max 2 Full wave rectified 15 of EL 0 01 Auxiliary voltage dependence operate value 20 of EL 0 01 Interrupted auxiliary DC voltage 24 60 V DC 20 90 250 V DC 20 Interruption interval 0 50 ms No restart 0 s Correct behaviour at power down Restart time 300 s Table 686 Frequency influe...

Page 829: ... Zone A Power frequency immunity test 150 300 V IEC 60255 26 Zone A Conducted common mode immunity test 15 Hz 150 kHz IEC 61000 4 16 Class IV Power frequency magnetic field test 1000 A m 3 s 100 A m cont IEC 61000 4 8 Class V Pulse magnetic field immunity test 1000 A m IEC 61000 4 9 Class V Damped oscillatory magnetic field test 100 A m IEC 61000 4 10 Class V Radiated electromagnetic field disturb...

Page 830: ...60068 2 78 Damp heat test cyclic Test Db for 6 cycles at 25 to 55 C and humidity 93 to 95 1 cycle 24 hours IEC 60068 2 30 Table 690 CE compliance Test According to Immunity EN 60255 26 Emissivity EN 60255 26 Low voltage directive EN 60255 27 Table 691 Mechanical tests Test Type test values Reference standards Vibration response test Class II IEC 60255 21 1 Vibration endurance test Class I IEC 6025...

Page 831: ...Section 22 Labels 22 1 Labels on IED Front view of IED 1 2 3 4 5 6 5 6 7 xx06000574 ep IEC06000574 V1 EN 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 22 Labels Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 825 Technical manual ...

Page 832: ...ge and rated frequency 3 Optional customer specific information 4 Manufacturer 5 Transformer input module rated currents and voltages 6 Transformer designations IEC06000576 POS NO V1 EN 7 Ordering and serial number Section 22 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Labels 826 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 833: ... en06000573 ep IEC06000573 V1 EN 1 Warning label 2 Caution label 3 Class 1 laser product label IEC06000575 V1 EN 4 Warning label 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 22 Labels Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 827 Technical manual ...

Page 834: ...828 ...

Page 835: ...duct delivery The latest versions of the connection diagrams can be downloaded from http www abb com substationautomation Connection diagrams for Customized products Connection diagram 670 series 2 1 1MRK002802 AF 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 23 Connection diagrams Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 829 Technical manual ...

Page 836: ...830 ...

Page 837: ...dent time characteristics are used Both alternatives are shown in a simple application with three overcurrent protections operating in series xx05000129_ansi vsd IPickup IPickup IPickup ANSI05000129 V1 EN Figure 325 Three overcurrent protections operating in series en05000130 vsd Time Fault point position Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 3 Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 1 IEC05000130 V1 EN Figure 326 Definite time ov...

Page 838: ...n between the operation time of the protections This required time margin is dependent of following factors in a simple case with two protections in series Difference between pickup time of the protections to be co ordinated Opening time of the breaker closest to the studied fault Reset times of the protections Margin dependent of the time delay inaccuracy of the protections Assume we have the fol...

Page 839: ...he trip is sent to the B1 circuit breaker At the time t2 the circuit breaker B1 has opened its primary contacts and thus the fault current is interrupted The breaker time t2 t1 can differ between different faults The maximum opening time can be given from manuals and test protocols Still at t2 the timer of protection A1 is active At time t3 the protection A1 is reset that is the timer is stopped I...

Page 840: ...o programmable curve types are supported via the component inputs p A B C pr tr and cr Different characteristics for reset delay can also be chosen If current in any phase exceeds the set pickup current value here internal signal pickupValue a timer according to the selected operating mode is started The component always uses the maximum of the three phase current values as the current level used ...

Page 841: ...e characteristic the following can be seen æ ö æ ö ç ç ç è ø è ø P op i t B td C A td Pickupn EQUATION1642 V1 EN Equation 85 where top is the operating time of the protection The time elapsed to the moment of trip is reached when the integral fulfils according to equation 86 in addition to the constant time delay æ ö æ ö ç ç ç è ø è ø ò 0 P t i C dt A td Pickupn EQUATION1643 V1 EN Equation 86 For ...

Page 842: ...r of the execution of the algorithm when the trip time equation is fulfilled that is when a trip is given and i j is the fault current at time j For inverse time operation the inverse time characteristic is selectable Both the IEC and ANSI IEEE standardized inverse time characteristics are supported For the IEC curves there is also a setting of the minimum time lag of operation see figure 329 Sect...

Page 843: ...lected setting value for time multiplier k In addition to the ANSI and IEC standardized characteristics there are also two additional inverse curves available the RI curve and the RD curve The RI inverse time curve emulates the characteristic of the electromechanical ASEA relay RI The curve is described by equation 89 æ ö ç ç ç ç è ø 0 339 0 235 td t s Pickupn i EQUATION1647 V1 EN Equation 89 wher...

Page 844: ...upn s B EQUATION1640 V1 EN Equation 91 Also the reset time of the delayed function can be controlled There is the possibility to choose between three different reset time lags Instantaneous Reset IEC Reset ANSI Reset If instantaneous reset is chosen the timer will be reset directly when the current drops below the set pickup current level minus the hysteresis If IEC reset is chosen the timer will ...

Page 845: ...stant time reset For the programmable inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time characteristics are available instantaneous IEC constant time reset and ANSI current dependent reset time If the current dependent type is used settings pr tr and cr must be given see equation 93 r pr t t s td i cr pickupn æ ö ç ç ç æ ö ç ç è è ø ø ANSIEQUATION1198 V1 EN Equation 93 For RI and RD...

Page 846: ...hever is greater ANSI Extremely Inverse A 28 2 B 0 1217 P 2 0 tr 29 1 ANSI Very inverse A 19 61 B 0 491 P 2 0 tr 21 6 ANSI Normal Inverse A 0 0086 B 0 0185 P 0 02 tr 0 46 ANSI Moderately Inverse A 0 0515 B 0 1140 P 0 02 tr 4 85 ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A 64 07 B 0 250 P 2 0 tr 30 ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A 28 55 B 0 712 P 2 0 tr 13 46 ANSI Long Time Inverse A 0 086 B 0 185 P 0 02 tr 4 6...

Page 847: ...R EQUATION1655 V1 EN I Imeasured Iset td 0 05 999 in steps of 0 01 A 0 005 200 000 in steps of 0 001 B 0 00 20 00 in steps of 0 01 C 0 1 10 0 in steps of 0 1 P 0 005 3 000 in steps of 0 001 TR 0 005 100 000 in steps of 0 001 CR 0 1 10 0 in steps of 0 1 PR 0 005 3 000 in steps of 0 001 Table 694 RI and RD type inverse time characteristics Function Range or value Accuracy RI type inverse characteris...

Page 848: ...ever is greater ANSI Extremely Inverse A 28 2 B 0 1217 P 2 0 tr 29 1 ANSI Very inverse A 19 61 B 0 491 P 2 0 tr 21 6 ANSI Normal Inverse A 0 0086 B 0 0185 P 0 02 tr 0 46 ANSI Moderately Inverse A 0 0515 B 0 1140 P 0 02 tr 4 85 ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A 64 07 B 0 250 P 2 0 tr 30 ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A 28 55 B 0 712 P 2 0 tr 13 46 ANSI Long Time Inverse A 0 086 B 0 185 P 0 02 tr 4 6 ...

Page 849: ...rammable characteristic Operate characteristic æ ö ç ç è ø P A t B td I C EQUATION1654 V1 EN Reset characteristic PR TR t td I CR EQUATION1655 V1 EN I Imeasured Iset td 0 05 999 in steps of 0 01 A 0 005 200 000 in steps of 0 001 B 0 00 20 00 in steps of 0 01 C 0 1 10 0 in steps of 0 1 P 0 005 3 000 in steps of 0 001 TR 0 005 100 000 in steps of 0 001 CR 0 1 10 0 in steps of 0 1 PR 0 005 3 000 in s...

Page 850: ...or value Accuracy Operating characteristic æ ö ç ç è ø 1 P A t B td I EQUATION1651 V1 EN Reset characteristic 2 1 tr t td I EQUATION1652 V1 EN I Imeasured Iset 0 10 k 2 00 1 5 x Iset I 20 x Iset ANSI IEEE C37 112 5 0 or 160 ms whichever is greater ANSI Extremely Inverse A 28 2 B 0 1217 P 2 0 tr 29 1 ANSI Very inverse A 19 61 B 0 491 P 2 0 tr 21 6 ANSI Normal Inverse A 0 0086 B 0 0185 P 0 02 tr 0 4...

Page 851: ...verse A 120 P 1 0 Programmable characteristic Trip characteristic æ ö ç ç è ø P A t B td I C EQUATION1654 V1 EN Reset characteristic PR TR t td I CR EQUATION1655 V1 EN I Imeasured Iset td 0 05 999 in steps of 0 01 A 0 005 200 000 in steps of 0 001 B 0 00 20 00 in steps of 0 01 C 0 1 10 0 in steps of 0 1 P 0 005 3 000 in steps of 0 001 TR 0 005 100 000 in steps of 0 001 CR 0 1 10 0 in steps of 0 1 ...

Page 852: ... or value Accuracy Operating characteristic æ ö ç ç è ø 1 P A t B td I EQUATION1651 V1 EN Reset characteristic 2 1 tr t td I EQUATION1652 V1 EN I Imeasured Iset td 0 05 2 00 in steps of 0 01 ANSI IEEE C37 112 5 0 or 40 ms whichever is greater ANSI Extremely Inverse A 28 2 B 0 1217 P 2 0 tr 29 1 ANSI Very inverse A 19 61 B 0 491 P 2 0 tr 21 6 ANSI Normal Inverse A 0 0086 B 0 0185 P 0 02 tr 0 46 ANS...

Page 853: ...sured Iset td 0 05 2 00 in steps of 0 01 IEC 60255 151 5 0 or 40 ms whichever is greater IEC Normal Inverse A 0 14 P 0 02 IEC Very inverse A 13 5 P 1 0 IEC Inverse A 0 14 P 0 02 IEC Extremely inverse A 80 0 P 2 0 IEC Short time inverse A 0 05 P 0 04 IEC Long time inverse A 120 P 1 0 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 24 Inverse time characteristics Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 847 Technical man...

Page 854: ... 0 05 1 10 in steps of 0 01 Type C curve 3 0 480 32 0 5 0 035 t td V VPickup VPickup EQUATION1663 V2 EN td 0 05 1 10 in steps of 0 01 Programmable curve æ ö ç è ø P td A t D V VPickup B C VPickup EQUATION1664 V1 EN td 0 05 1 10 in steps of 0 01 A 0 005 200 000 in steps of 0 001 B 0 50 100 00 in steps of 0 01 C 0 0 1 0 in steps of 0 1 D 0 000 60 000 in steps of 0 001 P 0 000 3 000 in steps of 0 001...

Page 855: ...kup V VPickup EQUATION1659 V1 EN V Vmeasured td 0 05 1 10 in steps of 0 01 Programmable curve é ù ê ú ê ú ê ú æ ö ê ú ç ëè ø û P td A t D VPickup V B C VPickup EQUATION1660 V1 EN V Vmeasured td 0 05 1 10 in steps of 0 01 A 0 005 200 000 in steps of 0 001 B 0 50 100 00 in steps of 0 01 C 0 0 1 0 in steps of 0 1 D 0 000 60 000 in steps of 0 001 P 0 000 3 000 in steps of 0 001 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Sect...

Page 856: ...A070750 V2 EN Figure 330 ANSI Extremely inverse time characteristics Section 24 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Inverse time characteristics 850 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 857: ...A070751 V2 EN Figure 331 ANSI Very inverse time characteristics 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 24 Inverse time characteristics Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 851 Technical manual ...

Page 858: ...A070752 V2 EN Figure 332 ANSI Normal inverse time characteristics Section 24 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Inverse time characteristics 852 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 859: ...A070753 V2 EN Figure 333 ANSI Moderately inverse time characteristics 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 24 Inverse time characteristics Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 853 Technical manual ...

Page 860: ...A070817 V2 EN Figure 334 ANSI Long time extremely inverse time characteristics Section 24 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Inverse time characteristics 854 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 861: ...A070818 V2 EN Figure 335 ANSI Long time very inverse time characteristics 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 24 Inverse time characteristics Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 855 Technical manual ...

Page 862: ...A070819 V2 EN Figure 336 ANSI Long time inverse time characteristics Section 24 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Inverse time characteristics 856 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 863: ...A070820 V2 EN Figure 337 IEC Normal inverse time characteristics 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 24 Inverse time characteristics Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 857 Technical manual ...

Page 864: ...A070821 V2 EN Figure 338 IEC Very inverse time characteristics Section 24 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Inverse time characteristics 858 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 865: ...A070822 V2 EN Figure 339 IEC Inverse time characteristics 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 24 Inverse time characteristics Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 859 Technical manual ...

Page 866: ...A070823 V2 EN Figure 340 IEC Extremely inverse time characteristics Section 24 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Inverse time characteristics 860 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 867: ...A070824 V2 EN Figure 341 IEC Short time inverse time characteristics 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 24 Inverse time characteristics Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 861 Technical manual ...

Page 868: ...A070825 V2 EN Figure 342 IEC Long time inverse time characteristics Section 24 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Inverse time characteristics 862 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 869: ...A070826 V2 EN Figure 343 RI type inverse time characteristics 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 24 Inverse time characteristics Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 863 Technical manual ...

Page 870: ...A070827 V2 EN Figure 344 RD type inverse time characteristics Section 24 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Inverse time characteristics 864 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 871: ...E 4CBD 8247 C6ABE3796FA6 V1 EN Figure 345 Inverse curve A characteristic of overvoltage protection 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 24 Inverse time characteristics Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 865 Technical manual ...

Page 872: ...8 4DC7 A84B 174544C09142 V1 EN Figure 346 Inverse curve B characteristic of overvoltage protection Section 24 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Inverse time characteristics 866 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 873: ...3 47F2 AEF9 45FF148CB679 V1 EN Figure 347 Inverse curve C characteristic of overvoltage protection 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 24 Inverse time characteristics Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 867 Technical manual ...

Page 874: ...3 40E6 9767 69C1536E3CBC V1 EN Figure 348 Inverse curve A characteristic of undervoltage protection Section 24 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Inverse time characteristics 868 Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI Technical manual ...

Page 875: ...5 4D9A A7C0 E274AA3A6BB1 V1 EN Figure 349 Inverse curve B characteristic of undervoltage protection 1MRK 511 365 UUS A Section 24 Inverse time characteristics Phasor measurement unit RES670 2 1 ANSI 869 Technical manual ...

Page 876: ...870 ...

Page 877: ...mmation current transformer ASD Adaptive signal detection ASDU Application service data unit AWG American Wire Gauge standard BBP Busbar protection BFOC 2 5 Bayonet fibre optic connector BFP Breaker failure protection BI Binary input BIM Binary input module BOM Binary output module BOS Binary outputs status BR External bistable relay BS British Standards BSR Binary signal transfer function receive...

Page 878: ...ng G 703 over a balanced line Involves two twisted pairs making it possible to transmit information in both directions COM Command COMTRADE Standard Common Format for Transient Data Exchange format for Disturbance recorder according to IEEE ANSI C37 111 1999 IEC60255 24 Contra directional Way of transmitting G 703 over a balanced line Involves four twisted pairs two of which are used for transmitt...

Page 879: ...ry DRH Disturbance report handler DSP Digital signal processor DTT Direct transfer trip scheme EHV network Extra high voltage network EIA Electronic Industries Association EMC Electromagnetic compatibility EMF Electromotive force EMI Electromagnetic interference EnFP End fault protection EPA Enhanced performance architecture ESD Electrostatic discharge F SMA Type of optical fibre connector FAN Fau...

Page 880: ... protocol based on the HDLC standard HFBR connector type Plastic fiber connector HMI Human machine interface HSAR High speed autoreclosing HV High voltage HVDC High voltage direct current IDBS Integrating deadband supervision IEC International Electrical Committee IEC 60044 6 IEC Standard Instrument transformers Part 6 Requirements for protective current transformers for transient performance IEC ...

Page 881: ... function in the IED is representative of a type of function IP 1 Internet protocol The network layer for the TCP IP protocol suite widely used on Ethernet networks IP is a connectionless best effort packet switching protocol It provides packet routing fragmentation and reassembly through the data link layer 2 Ingression protection according to IEC 60529 IP 20 Ingression protection according to IE...

Page 882: ... On load tap changer OTEV Disturbance data recording initiated by other event than start pick up OV Overvoltage Overreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault condition For example a distance relay is overreaching when the impedance presented to it is smaller than the apparent impedance to the fault applied to the balance point that is the set reach The relay sees the fault...

Page 883: ...RTC Real time clock RTU Remote terminal unit SA Substation Automation SBO Select before operate SC Switch or push button to close SCL Short circuit location SCS Station control system SCADA Supervision control and data acquisition SCT System configuration tool according to standard IEC 61850 SDU Service data unit SLM Serial communication module SMA connector Subminiature version A A threaded conne...

Page 884: ... at specific protocol layers TCP IP is often used to refer to the entire US Department of Defense protocol suite based upon these including Telnet FTP UDP and RDP TEF Time delayed gound fault protection function TLS Transport Layer Security TM Transmit disturbance data TNC connector Threaded Neill Concelman a threaded constant impedance version of a BNC connector TP Trip recorded fault TPZ TPY TPX...

Page 885: ...h s irregular rotation on which UT1 is based The Coordinated Universal Time is expressed using a 24 hour clock and uses the Gregorian calendar It is used for aeroplane and ship navigation where it is also sometimes known by the military name Zulu time Zulu in the phonetic alphabet stands for Z which stands for longitude zero UV Undervoltage WEI Weak end infeed logic VT Voltage transformer X 21 A d...

Page 886: ...880 ...

Page 887: ...881 ...

Page 888: ... notice ABB AB does not accept any responsibility whatsoever for potential errors or possible lack of information in this document We reserve all rights in this document and in the subject matter and illustrations contained herein Any reproduction disclosure to third parties or utilization of its contents in whole or in part is forbidden without prior written consent of ABB AB Copyright 2016 ABB A...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for Relion 670 Series RES670

Brand: Samson Pages: 4

Brand: A&D Pages: 74

Brand: Callaway Pages: 11

Brand: Facom Pages: 42

Brand: WalkLAB Pages: 16

Portable Grand DGX-670

Brand: Yamaha Pages: 93

Portatone PSR-410

Brand: Yamaha Pages: 65

Signet FlowtraMag 2580 Series

Brand: GF Pages: 20

Brand: Ocea Soft Pages: 19

Brand: Flowmetrics Pages: 102

Brand: S+S Regeltechnik Pages: 32

Brand: BD Sensors Pages: 4

Brand: Roland Pages: 2

Brand: Karman Pages: 2

Brand: Elcontrol Pages: 7

Brand: Tektronix Pages: 116

Brand: Oldham Pages: 80

Brand: KATA Pages: 20

Brands by name

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Popular brands

Load more brands